1 Equipment Architecture ...............................................................................
1-1
1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 ...................................................... 1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500 ...................................................... 1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A .................................................... 1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B ....................................................
1-1 1-3 1-5 1-5
2 Cabinet ...........................................................................................................
2-1
2.1 Types...................................................................................................... 2.2 Cabinet Configuration ............................................................................. 2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators .......................................................................... 2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit .................................................................. 2.2.3 Other Configuration........................................................................ 2.3 Technical Parameters ............................................................................
2-1 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-5
3 Subrack ..........................................................................................................
3-1
3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500 ........................................................... 3.1.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3.1.2 Slot Distribution .............................................................................. 3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots ............................................. 3.1.4 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 ........................................................... 3.2.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3.2.2 Slot Distribution .............................................................................. 3.2.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots ............................................. 3.2.4 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG .................................................. 3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A ......................................................... 3.4.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3.4.2 Slot Distribution .............................................................................. 3.4.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots ............................................. 3.4.4 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B ......................................................... 3.5.1 Structure ........................................................................................ 3.5.2 Slot Distribution .............................................................................. 3.5.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots ............................................. 3.5.4 Technical Parameters ....................................................................
3-1 3-1 3-3 3-4 3-9 3-9 3-9 3-11 3-13 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-19 3-19 3-20 3-23 3-24 3-24 3-25 3-27 3-31
4 Board Classification and List ......................................................................
4-1
4.1 Board Classification ................................................................................ 4.1.1 SDH Boards ................................................................................... 4.1.2 PDH Boards ...................................................................................
4-1 4-1 4-3
4.1.3 Data Processing Boards ................................................................ 4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards ................................................... 4.1.5 Other Boards .................................................................................. 4.2 Board Appearance .................................................................................
4-4 4-6 4-9 4-10
5 SDH Boards ...................................................................................................
5-1
5.1 SL64 ....................................................................................................... 5.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.1.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.1.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.1.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.1.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 5.2 SF16/SL16 ............................................................................................. 5.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.2.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.2.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.2.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 ..................................................................................... 5.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.3.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.3.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.3.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1 ..................................................................................... 5.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.4.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.4.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.4.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1 ........................................................... 5.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.5.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.5.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.5.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.5.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................
5-1 5-1 5-2 5-4 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-7 5-7 5-8 5-10 5-11 5-11 5-12 5-15 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-19 5-21 5-22 5-22 5-24 5-25 5-25 5-26 5-27 5-28 5-29 5-29 5-30 5-31 5-31
5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8 ........................................................................ 5.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 5.6.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 5.6.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 5.6.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 5.6.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 5.6.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 5.6.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................
5-32 5-33 5-34 5-35 5-36 5-40 5-40 5-40
6 PDH Boards ...................................................................................................
6-1
6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8 ................................................................................. 6.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.1.3 Principle ......................................................................................... 6.1.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.1.5 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 6.1.6 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 6.1.7 Version Description ........................................................................ 6.1.8 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S ................................................................... 6.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 6.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.2.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 6.2.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 6.2.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 6.2.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B ................................................................. 6.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 6.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.3.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 6.3.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 6.3.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 6.3.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S .............................................................................. 6.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 6.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.4.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 6.4.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 6.4.6 Version Description ........................................................................
6-1 6-2 6-2 6-4 6-5 6-9 6-9 6-9 6-11 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-15 6-20 6-20 6-20 6-22 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-26 6-29 6-29 6-29 6-31 6-31 6-32 6-32 6-33 6-35 6-35
6.4.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................
6-35
7 Data Processing Boards ..............................................................................
7-1
7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 ............................................................... 7.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.1.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.1.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.1.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.1.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8 .................................................... 7.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.2.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 7.2.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.2.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.2.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 7.3 EMR0/EGR2 ........................................................................................... 7.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.3.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.3.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.3.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 7.4 ADL4/ADQ1 ............................................................................................ 7.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.4.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 7.4.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.4.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.4.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 7.5 IDL4/IDQ1 .............................................................................................. 7.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.5.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.5.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 7.5.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.5.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.5.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................
7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-8 7-8 7-9 7-11 7-12 7-14 7-15 7-17 7-19 7-20 7-21 7-24 7-24 7-27 7-28 7-30 7-32 7-33 7-34 7-34 7-35 7-36 7-38 7-38 7-39 7-39 7-40 7-40 7-41 7-41 7-43 7-43 7-44 7-44
7.6 MST4 ...................................................................................................... 7.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.6.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 7.6.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.6.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 7.6.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 7.6.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................
7-45 7-45 7-46 7-48 7-49 7-49 7-49
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards ..............................................
8-1
8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE ....................................................................... 8.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.1.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 8.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.1.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 8.1.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 8.1.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 ................................................................................ 8.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 8.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.2.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................ 8.2.5 Parameter Configuration ................................................................ 8.2.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 8.2.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 8.3 SCC/GSCC ............................................................................................ 8.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.3.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 8.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.3.4 Version Description ........................................................................ 8.3.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 8.4 CRG ....................................................................................................... 8.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.4.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 8.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.4.4 Version Description........................................................................ 8.4.5 Technical Parameters ....................................................................
8-2 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-6 8-7 8-7 8-9 8-9 8-10 8-11 8-13 8-13 8-14 8-14 8-16 8-16 8-17 8-18 8-21 8-21 8-22 8-22 8-23 8-24 8-26 8-26
9 Other Boards .................................................................................................
9-1
9.1 LWX ........................................................................................................ 9.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.1.2 Principle .........................................................................................
9-1 9-1 9-2
9.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.1.4 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.1.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C ............................................................................... 9.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.2.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.2.4 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.2.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.3 BA2/BPA ................................................................................................ 9.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.3.2 Application ..................................................................................... 9.3.3 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.3.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.3.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.3.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.4 COA ........................................................................................................ 9.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.4.2 Application ..................................................................................... 9.4.3 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.4.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.4.5 Installation ...................................................................................... 9.4.6 Version Description. ....................................................................... 9.4.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.5 DCU ........................................................................................................ 9.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.5.2 Application ..................................................................................... 9.5.3 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.5.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.5.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.5.6 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI ............................................................................... 9.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.6.2 Principle Of AUX ............................................................................ 9.6.3 Principle of EOW ............................................................................ 9.6.4 Principle of SAP ............................................................................. 9.6.5 Principle of SEI .............................................................................. 9.6.6 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation ..................................................................... 9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper ................................................................. 9.6.9 Version Description ........................................................................
9-3 9-5 9-5 9-7 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-11 9-11 9-12 9-12 9-12 9-13 9-14 9-15 9-15 9-16 9-17 9-17 9-18 9-19 9-22 9-23 9-23 9-25 9-25 9-25 9-26 9-26 9-28 9-28 9-30 9-30 9-33 9-33 9-34 9-35 9-36 9-44 9-46 9-46
9.6.10 Technical Parameters .................................................................. 9.7 PIU ......................................................................................................... 9.7.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU ....................................................... 9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU .......................................................................... 9.7.4 Principle of R2PIU .......................................................................... 9.7.5 Front Pane ..................................................................................... 9.7.6 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.7.7 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.8 UPM ....................................................................................................... 9.8.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.8.2 Principle ......................................................................................... 9.8.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.8.4 Precautions .................................................................................... 9.8.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 9.9 FAN ........................................................................................................ 9.9.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN ........................................................................ 9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN ........................................................................ 9.9.4 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.9.5 Version Description ........................................................................ 9.9.6 Technical Parameters ....................................................................
9-47 9-48 9-48 9-48 9-49 9-49 9-50 9-54 9-54 9-55 9-56 9-56 9-57 9-58 9-58 9-59 9-60 9-60 9-61 9-61 9-62 9-62
10 Cables ..........................................................................................................
10-1
10.1 Fiber Jumper ........................................................................................ 10.1.1 Classification ................................................................................ 10.1.2 Connector .................................................................................... 10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable...................................................... 10.2.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable ................................... 10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable .................................................... 10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable .................................................................. 10.2.4 Equipment -48 V/-60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable ... 10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable ............................................................... 10.2.6 UPM Power Cable ....................................................................... 10.3 Alarm Cable.......................................................................................... 10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable ............................................................... 10.3.2 Indicator/ Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks ................................................................................................. 10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack ......................................................................................... 10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/ Output Cable ................................... 10.4 Management Cable ..............................................................................
10-1 10-1 10-2 10-5 10-5 10-7 10-8 10-9 10-11 10-12 10-14 10-14 10-15 10-17 10-18 10-21
10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable ................................................................. 10.4.2 Serial 1-4/F&f Cable..................................................................... 10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable...................................................... 10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire ........................................................... 10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable ........................................................... 10.4.6 Straight Through Cable ................................................................ 10.4.7 Crossover Cable .......................................................................... 10.5 Signal Cable ......................................................................................... 10.5.1 75ohm 8xE1 Cable ...................................................................... 10.5.2 75ohm 16xE1 Cable .................................................................... 10.5.3 120ohm 8xE1 Cable .................................................................... 10.5.4 120ohm 16xE1 Cable .................................................................. 10.5.5 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable .................................................................. 10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable ............................. 10.6 Clock Cable .......................................................................................... 10.6.1 Clock Cable .................................................................................. 10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable ...............................................
10-21 10-22 10-24 10-25 10-26 10-27 10-29 10-31 10-31 10-33 10-35 10-37 10-39 10-41 10-43 10-43 10-45
A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board .......................................
A-1
A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description ................................................................. A.2 Board Indicator Description ....................................................................
A-1 A-2
B Board Version Description ..........................................................................
B-1
B.1 Board Version List .................................................................................. B.2 Version Description ................................................................................ B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board .......................................................... B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board............................................................ B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards ................................................... B.2.4 Other Boards .................................................................................
B-1 B-4 B-4 B-5 B-7 B-8
C Power Consumption and Weight ................................................................
C-1
D Abbreviations and Acronyms .....................................................................
D-1
Index .................................................................................................................
HUAWEI
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description Manual V100R003
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description Manual Manual Version
T2-042590-20051020-C-1.31
Product Version
V100R003
BOM
31250390
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd., Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China Postal Code: 518129 Website: http://www.huawei.com Email:
[email protected]
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Copyright © 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks , HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC, TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800, TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, HUAWEIOptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Summary of Updates This section provides the update history of this manual and introduces the updates of contents.
Update History Manual Version
Notes
T2-042587-20040215-C-1.10
Initial field trial release
T2-042586-20040501-C-1.11
The manual style is modified.
T2-042552-20041026-C-1.20
Descriptions of the EGT2, EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1, MST4, LMST4, UXCS, XCE, LWX, and MR2A are added.
T2-042552-20050228-C-1.21
Descriptions of the ETS8, SF64, and COA are added.
T2-042590-20050820-C-1.30
1. The hardware description manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 are combined into one. 2. The descriptions of the CRG, PIU, PL3A, R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SL1, R1SLQ1and MST4 boards are added. 3. The manual is reorganized. The boards are described in several chapters.
T2-042590-20051020-C-1.31
Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version. Delete the description of the N1SL64 and N1SF64 board. Update the weight of the ETSI cabinet and the power consumption of the boards.
Updates of Contents Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Manual Version 1.31 Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version. Delete the description of the N1SL64 and N1SF64 board.
Updates in Manual Version 1.30 The hardware description manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and Huawei Technologies Proprietary
OptiX OSN 1500 are combined into one. The manual is reorganized. Chapter 4 of the original manual is divided into 6 chapters (chapter 4 to chapter 9). Chapter 1 Equipment Architecture Introduces the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A and OptiX OSN 1500B respectively. Chapter 2 Cabinet Introduces the cabinet used by OptiX OSN series products. Chapter 3 Subrack Introduces the subrack structure and board configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500REG, OptiX OSN 1500A and OptiX OSN 1500B. Chapter 4 Board Classification and List This is a new chapter, which introduces board classification and gives a list of boards. The subsequent chapters (chapter 5–chapter 9) give detailed descriptions. Chapter 5 SDH Boards The descriptions of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SL1 and R1SLQ1 are added. Chapter 6 PDH Boards The descriptions of the PL3A is added. Chapter 7 Data Processing Boards The descriptions of the N3EFS0, N3EGS2 and N3EFS4 are added. Chapter 8 Cross-connect and SCC Boards The descriptions of the CRG is added. Chapter 9 Other Boards The descriptions of the PIU and FANA are added. Appendix B Board Version Description It is newly added, introducing version characteristics of all boards of the OptiX OSN series products and their differences.
Updates in Manual Version 1.21 Chapter 3 Subrack The boards ETS8, SF64 and COA are added in the table 3-2. Chapter 4 Boards The detailed descriptions of following boards are added: ETS8, SF64 and COA. The detailed descriptions of following boards are modified and improved: EGS2/EFS0/EFS4. Chapter 5 Cables Classification and descriptions of cables are improved.
Updates in Manual Version 1.20 Chapter 3 Subrack The boards EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1, MR2A, LWX, EGT2, XCE and UXCS are added in the table 3-2.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Chapter 4 Boards The detailed descriptions of following boards are added: EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1, MR2A, LWX, EGT2, XCE and UXCS.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Contents
Contents 1 Equipment Architecture
1-1
1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500
1-1
1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500
1-3
1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A
1-5
1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B
1-5
2 Cabinet
2-1
2.1 Types
2-1
2.2 Cabinet Configuration
2-3
2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators
2-3
2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit
2-4
2.2.3 Other Configuration
2-4
2.3 Technical Parameters
2-5
3 Subrack
3-1
3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500
3-1
3.1.1 Structure
3-1
3.1.2 Slot Distribution
3-3
3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots
3-4
3.1.4 Technical Parameters
3-9
3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500
3-9
3.2.1 Structure
3-9
3.2.2 Slot Distribution
3-11
3.2.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots
3-13
3.2.4 Technical Parameters
3-17
3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG
3-18
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
i
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Contents
3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A
3-19
3.4.1 Structure
3-19
3.4.2 Slot Distribution
3-19
3.4.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots
3-20
3.4.4 Technical Parameters
3-23
3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B
3-24
3.5.1 Structure
3-24
3.5.2 Slot Distribution
3-25
3.5.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots
3-27
3.5.4 Technical Parameters
3-31
4 Board Classification and List
4-1
4.1 Board Classification
4-1
4.1.1 SDH Boards
4-1
4.1.2 PDH Boards
4-3
4.1.3 Data Processing Boards
4-4
4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards
4-6
4.1.5 Other Boards
4-9
4.2 Board Appearance
4-10
5 SDH Boards
5-1
5.1 SL64
5-1
5.1.1 Functionality
5-1
5.1.2 Principle
5-2
5.1.3 Front Panel
5-4
5.1.4 Parameter Configuration
5-5
5.1.5 Version Description
5-5
5.1.6 Technical Parameters
5-5
5.2 SF16/SL16
5-7
5.2.1 Functionality
5-7
5.2.2 Principle
5-8
5.2.3 Front Panel
5-10
5.2.4 Parameter Configuration
5-11
5.2.5 Version Description
5-11
5.2.6 Technical Parameters
5-12
5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
5-15
5.3.1 Functionality
5-15
5.3.2 Principle
5-16
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
ii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Contents
5.3.3 Front Panel
5-17
5.3.4 Parameter Configuration
5-18
5.3.5 Version Description
5-19
5.3.6 Technical Parameters
5-19
5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1
5-21
5.4.1 Functionality
5-22
5.4.2 Principle
5-22
5.4.3 Front Panel
5-24
5.4.4 Parameter Configuration
5-25
5.4.5 Version Description
5-25
5.4.6 Technical Parameters
5-26
5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1
5-27
5.5.1 Functionality
5-28
5.5.2 Principle
5-29
5.5.3 Front Panel
5-29
5.5.4 Parameter Configuration
5-30
5.5.5 Version Description
5-31
5.5.6 Technical Parameters
5-31
5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8
5-32
5.6.1 Functionality
5-33
5.6.2 Principle
5-34
5.6.3 Front Panel
5-35
5.6.4 Protection Configuration
5-36
5.6.5 Parameter Configuration
5-40
5.6.6 Version Description
5-40
5.6.7 Technical Parameters
5-40
6 PDH Boards
6-1
6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8
6-1
6.1.2 Functionality
6-2
6.1.3 Principle
6-2
6.1.4 Front Panel
6-4
6.1.5 Protection Configuration
6-5
6.1.6 Parameter Configuration
6-9
6.1.7 Version Description
6-9
6.1.8 Technical Parameters
6-9
6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S
6-11
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
iii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Contents
6.2.1 Functionality
6-11
6.2.2 Principle
6-12
6.2.3 Front Panel
6-13
6.2.4 Protection Configuration
6-15
6.2.5 Parameter Configuration
6-20
6.2.6 Version Description
6-20
6.2.7 Technical Parameters
6-20
6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B
6-22
6.3.1 Functionality
6-22
6.3.2 Principle
6-23
6.3.3 Front Panel
6-24
6.3.4 Protection Configuration
6-26
6.3.5 Parameter Configuration
6-29
6.3.6 Version Description
6-29
6.3.7 Technical Parameters
6-29
6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S
6-31
6.4.1 Functionality
6-31
6.4.2 Principle
6-32
6.4.3 Front Panel
6-32
6.4.4 Protection Configuration
6-33
6.4.5 Parameter Configuration
6-35
6.4.6 Version Description
6-35
6.4.7 Technical Parameters
6-35
7 Data Processing Boards
7-1
7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
7-2
7.1.1 Functionality
7-3
7.1.2 Principle
7-4
7.1.3 Front Panel
7-5
7.1.4 Parameter Configuration
7-8
7.1.5 Version Description
7-8
7.1.6 Technical Parameters
7-9
7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8
7-11
7.2.1 Functionality
7-12
7.2.2 Principle
7-14
7.2.3 Front Panel
7-15
7.2.4 Protection Configuration
7-17
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
iv
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Contents
7.2.5 Parameter Configuration
7-19
7.2.6 Version Description
7-20
7.2.7 Technical Parameters
7-21
7.3 EMR0/EGR2
7-24
7.3.1 Functionality
7-24
7.3.2 Principle
7-27
7.3.3 Front Panel
7-28
7.3.4 Parameter Configuration
7-30
7.3.5 Version Description
7-32
7.3.6 Technical Parameters
7-33
7.4 ADL4/ADQ1
7-34
7.4.1 Functionality
7-34
7.4.2 Principle
7-35
7.4.3 Front Panel
7-36
7.4.4 Protection Configuration
7-38
7.4.5 Parameter Configuration
7-38
7.4.6 Version Description
7-39
7.4.7 Technical Parameters
7-39
7.5 IDL4/IDQ1
7-40
7.5.1 Functionality
7-40
7.5.2 Principle
7-41
7.5.3 Front Panel
7-41
7.5.4 Protection Configuration
7-43
7.5.5 Parameter Configuration
7-43
7.5.6 Version Description
7-44
7.5.7 Technical Parameters
7-44
7.6 MST4
7-45
7.6.1 Functionality
7-45
7.6.2 Principle
7-46
7.6.3 Front Panel
7-48
7.6.4 Parameter Configuration
7-49
7.6.5 Version Description
7-49
7.6.6 Technical Parameters
7-49
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards 8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE
8-1 8-2
8.1.1 Functionality
8-2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
v
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Contents
8.1.2 Principle
8-3
8.1.3 Front Panel
8-4
8.1.4 Protection Configuration
8-6
8.1.5 Parameter Configuration
8-7
8.1.6 Version Description
8-7
8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16
8-9
8.2.1 Functionality
8-9
8.2.2 Principle
8-10
8.2.3 Front Panel
8-11
8.2.4 Protection Configuration
8-13
8.2.5 Parameter Configuration
8-13
8.2.6 Version Description
8-14
8.2.7 Technical Parameters
8-14
8.3 SCC/GSCC
8-16
8.3.1 Functionality
8-16
8.3.2 Principle
8-17
8.3.3 Front Panel
8-18
8.3.4 Version Description
8-21
8.3.5 Technical Parameters
8-21
8.4 CRG
8-22
8.4.1 Functionality
8-22
8.4.2 Principle
8-23
8.4.3 Front Panel
8-24
8.4.4 Version Description
8-26
8.4.5 Technical Parameters
8-26
9 Other Boards
9-1
9.1 LWX
9-1
9.1.1 Functionality
9-1
9.1.2 Principle
9-2
9.1.3 Front Panel
9-3
9.1.4 Version Description
9-5
9.1.5 Technical Parameters
9-5
9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
9-7
9.2.1 Functionality
9-7
9.2.2 Principle
9-8
9.2.3 Front Panel
9-9
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
vi
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Contents
9.2.4 Version Description
9-11
9.2.5 Technical Parameters
9-11
9.3 BA2/BPA
9-12
9.3.1 Functionality
9-12
9.3.2 Application
9-12
9.3.3 Principle
9-13
9.3.4 Front Panel
9-14
9.3.5 Version Description
9-15
9.3.6 Technical Parameters
9-15
9.4 COA
9-16
9.4.1 Functionality
9-17
9.4.2 Application
9-17
9.4.3 Principle
9-18
9.4.4 Front Panel
9-19
9.4.5 Installation
9-22
9.4.6 Version Description.
9-23
9.4.7 Technical Parameters
9-23
9.5 DCU
9-25
9.5.1 Functionality
9-25
9.5.2 Application
9-25
9.5.3 Principle
9-26
9.5.4 Front Panel
9-26
9.5.5 Version Description
9-28
9.5.6 Technical Parameters
9-28
9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI
9-30
9.6.1 Functionality
9-30
9.6.2 Principle Of AUX
9-33
9.6.3 Principle of EOW
9-33
9.6.4 Principle of SAP
9-34
9.6.5 Principle of SEI
9-35
9.6.6 Front Panel
9-36
9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation
9-44
9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper
9-46
9.6.9 Version Description
9-46
9.6.10 Technical Parameters
9-47
9.7 PIU
9-48
9.7.1 Functionality
9-48
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
vii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Contents
9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU
9-48
9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU
9-49
9.7.4 Principle of R2PIU
9-49
9.7.5 Front Pane
9-50
9.7.6 Version Description
9-54
9.7.7 Technical Parameters
9-54
9.8 UPM
9-55
9.8.1 Functionality
9-56
9.8.2 Principle
9-56
9.8.3 Front Panel
9-57
9.8.4 Precautions
9-58
9.8.5 Technical Parameters
9-58
9.9 FAN
9-59
9.9.1 Functionality
9-60
9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN
9-60
9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN
9-61
9.9.4 Front Panel
9-61
9.9.5 Version Description
9-62
9.9.6 Technical Parameters
9-62
10 Cables
10-1
10.1 Fiber Jumper
10-1
10.1.1 Classification
10-1
10.1.2 Connector
10-2
10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable
10-5
10.2.1 Cabinet –48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable
10-5
10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable
10-7
10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable
10-8
10.2.4 Equipment –48 V/–60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable
10-9
10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable
10-11
10.2.6 UPM Power Cable
10-12
10.3 Alarm Cable
10-14
10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable
10-14
10.3.2 Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks
10-15
10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack
10-17
10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/Output Cable
10-18
10.4 Management Cable
10-21
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
viii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Contents
10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable
10-21
10.4.2 Serial 1–4/F&f Cable
10-22
10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable
10-24
10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire
10-25
10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable
10-26
10.4.6 Straight Through Cable
10-27
10.4.7 Crossover Cable
10-29
10.5 Signal Cable
10-31
10.5.1 75 Ω 8xE1 Cable
10-31
10.5.2 75 Ω 16xE1 Cable
10-33
10.5.3 120 Ω 8xE1 Cable
10-35
10.5.4 120 Ω 16xE1 Cable
10-37
10.5.5 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable
10-39
10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable
10-41
10.6 Clock Cable
10-43
10.6.1 Clock Cable
10-43
10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable
10-45
A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board
A-1
A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description
A-1
A.2 Board Indicator Description
A-2
B Board Version Description
B-1
B.1 Board Version List
B-1
B.2 Version Description
B-4
B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board
B-4
B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board
B-5
B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards
B-7
B.2.4 Other Boards
B-8
C Power Consumption and Weight
C-1
D Abbreviations and Acronyms
D-1
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
ix
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Figures
Figures Figure 1-1 The OptiX OSN 3500
1-1
Figure 1-2 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500
1-2
Figure 1-3 The OptiX OSN 2500
1-3
Figure 1-4 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500
1-4
Figure 1-5 The OptiX OSN 1500A
1-5
Figure 1-6 The OptiX OSN 1500B
1-5
Figure 2-1 The 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet
2-2
Figure 2-2 The ETSI cabinet configuration
2-3
Figure 2-3 The power distribution unit
2-4
Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
3-2
Figure 3-2 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 3500
3-3
Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack
3-10
Figure 3-4 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)
3-11
Figure 3-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)
3-11
Figure 3-6 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)
3-12
Figure 3-7 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)
3-12
Figure 3-8 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A
3-19
Figure 3-9 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (before slot segmentation)
3-19
Figure 3-10 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (after slot segmentation)
3-20
Figure 3-11 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A
3-20
Figure 3-12 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B
3-24
Figure 3-13 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)
3-25
Figure 3-14 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)
3-25
Figure 3-15 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)
3-26
Figure 3-16 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)
3-26
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
x
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Figures
Figure 4-1 Board appearance
4-11
Figure 5-1 The principle block diagram of the SL64
5-3
Figure 5-2 The front panel of the SL64
5-4
Figure 5-3 The principle block diagram of the SF16
5-9
Figure 5-4 The front panel of the SL16 and the SF16
5-10
Figure 5-5 The principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
5-16
Figure 5-6 The front panel of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4
5-18
Figure 5-7 The principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
5-23
Figure 5-8 The front panel of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
5-24
Figure 5-9 The front panel of the R1SL4 and R1SLD4
5-29
Figure 5-10 The front panel of the R1SL1 and R1SLQ1
5-29
Figure 5-11 The principle block diagram of the SEP1
5-34
Figure 5-12 The front panel of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8
5-35
Figure 5-13 1:3 TPS protection of the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500
5-37
Figure 5-14 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500
5-38
Figure 5-15 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 2500
5-39
Figure 5-16 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
5-39
Figure 6-1 The functional block diagram of the SPQ4
6-3
Figure 6-2 The front panel of the SPQ4 and MU04
6-4
Figure 6-3 The 1:3 TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-6
Figure 6-4 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-7
Figure 6-5 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 2500
6-8
Figure 6-6 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
6-8
Figure 6-7 The functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A
6-12
Figure 6-8 The mapping and multiplexing process of E3/DS3 signals
6-13
Figure 6-9 The front panel of the PD3, PL3, PL3A, C34S and D34S
6-14
Figure 6-10 The 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-16
Figure 6-11 Board layout upon 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-18
Figure 6-12 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 n the OptiX OSN 2500
6-19
Figure 6-13 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
6-20
Figure 6-14 The functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM
6-23
Figure 6-15 The mapping and multiplexing process of E1/T1 signals
6-24
Figure 6-16 The front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
6-25
Figure 6-17 The 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-27
Figure 6-18 Slot assignment upon 1:8 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-28
Figure 6-19 Slot assignment upon 1:4 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 2500
6-29
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xi
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Figures
Figure 6-20 The front panel of the PD1, PL1, L12S and L75S
6-32
Figure 6-21 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500
6-34
Figure 6-22 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1
6-35
Figure 7-1 Functional block diagram of the EGT2
7-5
Figure 7-2 Front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
7-6
Figure 7-3 Functional block diagram of the EGS2
7-14
Figure 7-4 Front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
7-15
Figure 7-5 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 3500
7-18
Figure 7-6 Board configuration upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 2500
7-19
Figure 7-7 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OSN 1500
7-19
Figure 7-8 Functional block diagram of the EMR0
7-27
Figure 7-9 Front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2
7-29
Figure 7-10 Functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1
7-35
Figure 7-11 Front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1
7-37
Figure 7-12 Front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1
7-42
Figure 7-13 The functional block diagram of the MST4
7-47
Figure 7-14 The front panel of the MST4
7-48
Figure 8-1 Functional block diagram of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS
8-3
Figure 8-2 Front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
8-4
Figure 8-3 Configuration of extended subracks
8-6
Figure 8-4 Functional block diagram of the CXL16
8-11
Figure 8-5 Front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
8-11
Figure 8-6 Functional block diagram of the SCC
8-17
Figure 8-7 Position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame
8-18
Figure 8-8 The front panel of the SCC and the GSCC
8-19
Figure 8-9 Functional block diagram of the CRG
8-23
Figure 8-10 Front panel of the CRG
8-24
Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the LWX
9-2
Figure 9-2 Front panel of the LWX
9-4
Figure 9-3 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C serves as OTM station
9-8
Figure 9-4 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C and LWX form OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals
9-8
Figure 9-5 Functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
9-9
Figure 9-6 Front panel of the MR2A
9-10
Figure 9-7 Position of BA and PA in the network
9-13
Figure 9-8 Functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA
9-13
Figure 9-9 Front panel of the BA2 and BPA
9-14
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Figures
Figure 9-10 Appearance of the 61COA (PA)
9-16
Figure 9-11 Appearance of the 62COA
9-17
Figure 9-12 Application of Raman amplifier (62COA)
9-18
Figure 9-13 Functional block diagram of 61COA
9-18
Figure 9-14 Front panel of the COA
9-19
Figure 9-15 Front panel of the 62COA
9-19
Figure 9-16 E2000 flange and fiber connector
9-20
Figure 9-17 Serial communication between the COA and the SCC
9-21
Figure 9-18 The position of the 61COA in the ETSI cabinet
9-23
Figure 9-19 The position of DCU in the optical transmission system
9-25
Figure 9-20 Functional block diagram of the DCU
9-26
Figure 9-21 Front panel of the DCU
9-27
Figure 9-22 Functional block diagram of the AUX
9-33
Figure 9-23 Functional block diagram of the EOW
9-34
Figure 9-24 Position of orderwire bytes in the SDH frame
9-34
Figure 9-25 Functional block diagram of the SAP
9-35
Figure 9-26 Functional block diagram of the SEI
9-36
Figure 9-27 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 3500)
9-45
Figure 9-28 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 2500)
9-45
Figure 9-29 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 3500)
9-46
Figure 9-30 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 2500)
9-46
Figure 9-31 The principle block diagram of the PIU
9-48
Figure 9-32 Functional block diagram of the R1PIU
9-49
Figure 9-33 Functional block diagram of the R2PIU
9-50
Figure 9-34 Front panel of the N1PIU
9-51
Figure 9-35 Front panel of the Q1PIU
9-51
Figure 9-36 Front panel of the R1PIU
9-52
Figure 9-37 Front panel of the R2PIU
9-53
Figure 9-38 Appearance of the power box
9-55
Figure 9-39 Rear view of the power box
9-57
Figure 9-40 Appearance of the FAN (OptiX OSN 3500)
9-59
Figure 9-41 Functional block diagram of the N1FAN
9-60
Figure 9-42 Functional block diagram of the R1FAN
9-61
Figure 9-43 Front panel of the R1FAN
9-62
Figure 10-1 LC/PC optical interface
10-3
Figure 10-2 SC/PC Optical interface
10-4
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xiii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Figures
Figure 10-3 FC/PC optical interface
10-4
Figure 10-4 E2000/APC optical interface
10-5
Figure 10-5 –48 V cabinet power cable/cabinet BGND power cable
10-6
Figure 10-6 Cabinet PGND power cable
10-6
Figure 10-7 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable
10-7
Figure 10-8 Structure of the subrack power cable
10-8
Figure 10-9 Structure of the –48 V/–60 V power cable
10-9
Figure 10-10 Structure of the PGND power cable
10-10
Figure 10-11 Structure of the HUB/COA power cable
10-11
Figure 10-12 Structure of the subrack power cable
10-12
Figure 10-13 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable
10-14
Figure 10-14 Structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks
10-16
Figure 10-15 Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack
10-17
Figure 10-16 Structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable
10-19
Figure 10-17 Structure of the OAM serial port cable
10-21
Figure 10-18 Structure of the serial 1–4/F&f cable
10-23
Figure 10-19 Structure of the RS-232/422 serial port cable
10-24
Figure 10-20 Structure of ordinary telephone wire
10-25
Figure 10-21 Structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable
10-27
Figure 10-22 Structure of straight through cable
10-28
Figure 10-23 Structure of the crossover cable
10-29
Figure 10-24 Structure of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable
10-31
Figure 10-25 Structure of the 75 Ω 16xE1 cable
10-33
Figure 10-26 Structure of the 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable
10-36
Figure 10-27 Structure of the 120 Ω 16xE1 cable
10-37
Figure 10-28 Structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable
10-40
Figure 10-29 Structure of the extended subrack service connection cable
10-41
Figure 10-30 Structure of the 75 Ω clock cable
10-44
Figure 10-31 Structure of the 120 Ω clock cable
10-44
Figure 10-32 Structure of the 1-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable
10-45
Figure 10-33 Structure of the 2-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable
10-46
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xiv
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Tables
Tables Table 2-1 Types of the cabinets for OptiX OSN products
2-1
Table 2-2 Description of ETSI cabinet indicators
2-3
Table 2-3 Mapping relation between terminals and PIU boards
2-4
Table 2-4 Technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet
2-5
Table 3-1 Slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500
3-3
Table 3-2 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity) 3-4 Table 3-3 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity) 3-6 Table 3-4 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500
3-7
Table 3-5 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500
3-8
Table 3-6 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
3-9
Table 3-7 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 2500
3-13
Table 3-8 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500
3-13
Table 3-9 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500
3-16
Table 3-10 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500
3-16
Table 3-11 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack
3-17
Table 3-12 The relation between boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG
3-18
Table 3-13 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A
3-21
Table 3-14 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A
3-22
Table 3-15 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A
3-23
Table 3-16 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 1500B
3-27
Table 3-17 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
3-27
Table 3-18 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
3-29
Table 3-19 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
3-30
Table 3-20 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B
3-31
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xv
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Tables
Table 4-1 SDH boards
4-2
Table 4-2 PDH boards
4-3
Table 4-3 Data processing boards
4-5
Table 4-4 Cross-Connect and SCC boards
4-7
Table 4-5 Other boards
4-9
Table 5-1 Slots for the SL64
5-1
Table 5-2 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL64
5-5
Table 5-3 Technical parameters of the SL64
5-5
Table 5-4 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with ITU-T G.692
5-6
Table 5-5 Slots for the SL16 and SF16
5-7
Table 5-6 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SF16/SL16
5-11
Table 5-7 Technical parameters of the SL16
5-12
Table 5-8 Technical parameters of the SF16
5-13
Table 5-9 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with G.692
5-14
Table 5-10 Slots for the SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4
5-15
Table 5-11 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
5-19
Table 5-12 Technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4
5-19
Table 5-13 Slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1
5-21
Table 5-14 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
5-25
Table 5-15 Technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1
5-26
Table 5-16 Slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1
5-27
Table 5-17 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for half-slot optical processing boards
5-30
Table 5-18 Technical parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1
5-31
Table 5-19 Slot for the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8
5-32
Table 5-20 Different access abilities of the SEP1
5-32
Table 5-21 Interfaces of the EU08 and OU08
5-36
Table 5-22 TPS protection of the SEP1
5-36
Table 5-23 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
5-38
Table 5-24 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500
5-39
Table 5-25 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
5-40
Table 5-26 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SEP1
5-40
Table 5-27 Technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8
5-41
Table 6-1 Slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8
6-1
Table 6-2 Interfaces on the MU04
6-5
Table 6-3 The TPS protection of the SPQ4
6-5
Table 6-4 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-7
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xvi
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Tables
Table 6-5 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500
6-8
Table 6-6 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
6-9
Table 6-7 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SPQ4
6-9
Table 6-8 Technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04
6-10
Table 6-9 Slots for the PL3, PL3A, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8
6-11
Table 6-10 Interfaces on the D34S
6-15
Table 6-11 The TPS protection of the PL3/PD3
6-15
Table 6-12 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:3 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-17
Table 6-13 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-18
Table 6-14 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 2500
6-18
Table 6-15 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500
6-19
Table 6-16 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 1500B
6-19
Table 6-17 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B in the OptiX OSN 1500B 6-20 Table 6-18 Technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S
6-21
Table 6-19 Slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
6-22
Table 6-20 Comparison between the PQ1 and PQM
6-22
Table 6-21 Comparison between the D75S, D12S, and D12B
6-25
Table 6-22 The TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM
6-26
Table 6-23 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:8 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-27
Table 6-24 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:4 TPS in the OptiX OSN 2500
6-28
Table 6-25 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B
6-29
Table 6-26 Technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
6-29
Table 6-27 Slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S
6-31
Table 6-28 Comparison between the PL1, L75S, and L12S
6-33
Table 6-29 The TPS protection of the PD1
6-33
Table 6-30 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:2 TPS of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500 6-34 Table 6-31 Slot assignment upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
6-35
Table 6-32 Technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S
6-36
Table 7-1 Slots for the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
7-2
Table 7-2 Indicators of the EGT2
7-7
Table 7-3 Indicators of the EFF8
7-7
Table 7-4 Interfaces of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
7-7
Table 7-5 Parameters for the Ethernet interface of EGT2/EFT8/EFT4
7-8
Table 7-6 Technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
7-9
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xvii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Tables
Table 7-7 Slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8
7-11
Table 7-8 Indicators of the EGS2
7-16
Table 7-9 Interfaces of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
7-16
Table 7-10 TPS protection of the EFS0
7-17
Table 7-11 Slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
7-18
Table 7-12 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0
7-20
Table 7-13 N1 and N2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 boards
7-21
Table 7-14 Technical parameters of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
7-22
Table 7-15 Slots for the EMR0 and EGR2
7-24
Table 7-16 Indicators of the EGR2
7-30
Table 7-17 Interfaces of EMR0 and EGR2
7-30
Table 7-18 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2
7-31
Table 7-19 Version description of the EMR0 and the EGR2
7-32
Table 7-20 Technical Parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2
7-33
Table 7-21 Slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1
7-34
Table 7-22 Parameters for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1
7-38
Table 7-23 Technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1
7-39
Table 7-24 Slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1
7-40
Table 7-25 Paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1
7-43
Table 7-26 Parameters for the ATM interface on the IDL4/IDQ1
7-43
Table 7-27 Technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1
7-44
Table 7-28 Slots for the MST4
7-45
Table 7-29 The service types and rates provided by the MST4
7-46
Table 7-30 Technical parameters of the MST4
7-49
Table 8-1 Comparison among GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE.
8-2
Table 8-2 Indicators of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
8-5
Table 8-3 External clock interface of the GXCS, EXCS and UXCS
8-6
Table 8-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards
8-7
Table 8-5 Technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
8-7
Table 8-6 Comparison among CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
8-9
Table 8-7 Indicators of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
8-12
Table 8-8 Interfaces of CXL
8-13
Table 8-9 Correspondence between C2 byte setting and service type
8-14
Table 8-10 Technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
8-14
Table 8-11 Switch description of the SCC
8-19
Table 8-12 Indicator description of the SCC
8-20
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xviii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Tables
Table 8-13 Technical parameters of the SCC
8-21
Table 8-14 Switch description of the CRG
8-24
Table 8-15 Indicator description of the CRG
8-25
Table 8-16 Technical parameters of the CRG
8-26
Table 9-1 Slots for the LWX
9-1
Table 9-2 Interfaces of the LWX
9-4
Table 9-3 Client-side optical interface parameters of the LWX
9-5
Table 9-4 DWDM-side optical interface parameters of the LWX
9-6
Table 9-5 Technical parameters of the LWX
9-6
Table 9-6 Slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C
9-7
Table 9-7 Interfaces of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
9-10
Table 9-8 Technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
9-11
Table 9-9 Slots for the BA2 and BPA
9-12
Table 9-10 Technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA
9-15
Table 9-11 Indicators of the 61COA/62COA
9-20
Table 9-12 Relation between output alarm and interface pin
9-21
Table 9-13 Technical parameters of the 61COA and 62COA
9-23
Table 9-14 Technical parameters of the DCU
9-28
Table 9-15 Slots for the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI
9-30
Table 9-16 Indicator of the AUX
9-36
Table 9-17 Interfaces of the N1AUX
9-37
Table 9-18 Pin assignment of CLK1 and CLK2 interface
9-38
Table 9-19 Pin assignment of ETH, COM, EXT and F1 interface
9-38
Table 9-20 Pin assignment of F&f interface
9-38
Table 9-21 Pin assignment of PHONE, V1 and V2 interface
9-39
Table 9-22 Pin assignment of LAMP1 and LAMP2 interface
9-39
Table 9-23 Pin assignment of ALMO1 and ALMO2 interface
9-39
Table 9-24 Pin assignment of OAM interface
9-40
Table 9-25 Pin assignment of S1, S2, S3 and S4 interface
9-40
Table 9-26 Pin assignment of ALMI1 interface
9-40
Table 9-27 Pin assignment of ALMI2 interface
9-41
Table 9-28 Pin assignment of ALMI3 interface
9-41
Table 9-29 Pin assignment of ALMI4 interface
9-41
Table 9-30 Interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel
9-42
Table 9-31 Indicators of the EOW
9-42
Table 9-32 Interfaces of the EOW
9-43
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xix
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Tables
Table 9-33 Interfaces of the SAP
9-43
Table 9-34 Interfaces of the SEI
9-43
Table 9-35 Jumper J9 setting
9-46
Table 9-36 Technical parameters of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI
9-47
Table 9-37 Interfaces on the N1PIU front panel
9-51
Table 9-38 Interfaces of the Q1PIU
9-52
Table 9-39 Indicator of the R1PIU
9-52
Table 9-40 Interfaces of the Q1PIU
9-52
Table 9-41 Indicators and the switch on the R2PIU front panel
9-53
Table 9-42 Technical parameters of the PIU
9-54
Table 9-43 Indicators of the power box
9-57
Table 9-44 Interfaces on the power box front panel
9-57
Table 9-45 Technical parameters of the UPM
9-58
Table 9-46 Indicator of the N1FAN
9-61
Table 9-47 Indicators of the R1FAN
9-62
Table 9-48 Technical parameters of the FAN
9-62
Table 10-1 Classification of fiber jumper
10-2
Table 10-2 Classification of fiber connector
10-3
Table 10-3 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables
10-5
Table 10-4 Pin assignment of subrack power cable
10-8
Table 10-5 Pin assignment of the –48 V/–60 V power cable
10-10
Table 10-6 Pin assignment of the HUB power cable
10-12
Table 10-7 Pin assignment of the UPM power cable
10-13
Table 10-8 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cable
10-14
Table 10-9 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable
10-15
Table 10-10 Pin assignment of indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks
10-16
Table 10-11 Pin assignment of alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack
10-18
Table 10-12 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 3500/2500
10-19
Table 10-13 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 1500
10-20
Table 10-14 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables
10-21
Table 10-15 Pin assignment of OAM serial port cable
10-22
Table 10-16 Pin assignment of the serial 1–4/F&f cable
10-23
Table 10-17 Pin assignment of the RS-232/422 serial port cable
10-25
Table 10-18 Pin assignment of ordinary telephone wire
10-26
Table 10-19 pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable
10-27
Table 10-20 Pin assignment of the straight through cable
10-28
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xx
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Tables
Table 10-21 Pin assignment of crossover cable
10-29
Table 10-22 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables
10-31
Table 10-23 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable
10-32
Table 10-24 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω 16xE1 cable
10-33
Table 10-25 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable
10-36
Table 10-26 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω 16xE1 cable
10-38
Table 10-27 Pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable
10-42
Table 10-28 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables
10-43
Table 10-29 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω clock cable
10-44
Table 10-30 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω/120 Ω clock transfer cable
10-46
Table B-1 N1 and N2 optical line interface boards
B-5
Table B-2 Ethernet processing board version
B-5
Table B-3 N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards
B-6
Table B-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards
B-7
Table B-5 N1SCC, N1GSCC and N2GSCC
B-7
Table B-6 Q1 and Q2 CXL1/4/16 boards
B-8
Table B-7 Version description of PIU, AUX and FAN
B-8
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
xxi
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
About This Manual
About This Manual Release Notes This manual covers:
The OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System, version V100R003
The OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System, version V100R003
The OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System, version V100R003
Related Manuals The following table shows the manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OSN 2500, and OSN 1500. OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Documentation Guide OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual System Description
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual System Description
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual System Description
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Installation Manual
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Installation Manual
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Installation Manual
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Electronic Documentation
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Electronic Documentation
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Electronic Documentation
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual Networking and Application
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual Networking and Application
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual Networking and Application
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description Manual OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Routine Maintenance
Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual OptiX OSN 3500
About This Manual OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Troubleshooting OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Alarm and Performance Event OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Commissioning Guide OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Configuration Guide Note: The manual name with OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 indicates that the manual is shared by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.
Main points of the manuals for the OptiX OSN series products are as follows.
Documentation Guide Introduces the contents and usage of the manuals.
Technical Manual System Description Introduces the functionality, structure, performance, specifications, and theory of the product.
Technical Manual Networking and Application Introduces the networking, protection, and application of the product.
Hardware Description Manual Introduces the hardware of the product, including the cabinet, subrack, power, fan, board, and a variety of interfaces.
Maintenance Manual Routine Maintenance Introduces the main items and precautions involved in routing maintenance.
Maintenance Troubleshooting Guides the analysis and troubleshooting of common faults.
Maintenance Alarm and Performance Event Guides the way of processing alarms and performance events.
Installation Manual Guides the on-site installation of the product, covering the installation of cabinet, subrack and components, and grounding specifications.
Commissioning Guide Introduces the equipment commissioning process, including indices of hardware, software, and service operation.
Configuration Guide Introduces the way and procedures of configuring SDH services, Ethernet private line services, Ethernet LAN services, RPR services, and ATM services on the T2000.
Electronic Documentation (CD-ROM) Covers all the preceding manuals. Acrobat Reader is attached.
Organization The manual is organized as follows.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxiii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
About This Manual
Chapter
Description
Chapter 1 Equipment Architecture
Introduces the architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500.
Chapter 2 Cabinet
Describes the dimensions, appearance, and technical specifications of the cabinets used by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500, and the configuration in the cabinets.
Chapter 3 Subrack
Introduces the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 subracks. Lists the board types that can seat in the slots of the subracks.
Chapter 4 Board Classification and List
Classifies the boards into SDH boards, PDH boards, data processing boards, cross-connect and SCC boards, and other boards, and gives a detailed list of all available boards.
Chapter 5 SDH Boards
Introduces SDH boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters.
Chapter 6 PDH Boards
Introduces PDH boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters.
Chapter 7 Data Processing Boards
Introduces data processing boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters.
Chapter 8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Introduces cross-connect and SCC boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters.
Chapter 9 Other Boards
Introduces other boards (for example, the system auxiliary interface board) in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters.
Chapter 10 Cables
Introduces the external and the internal cables of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500, and gives detailed description in terms of the structure, appearance, pin assignment, and technical parameters.
Appendix A–Appendix D
Includes four appendices: Appendix A Quick Reference for Indicators Appendix B Power Consumption and Weight of Boards Appendix C Board Version Configuration Appendix D Abbreviations and Acronyms The appendices give a quick searching to equipment-related information during routine maintenance. Readers can locate the chapter where required information is covered through appendices quickly.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxiv
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
About This Manual
Intended Audience This manual is intended for:
Network administrator
Maintenance engineer
Provisioning engineer
Conventions The manual uses the following conventions.
Symbol Conventions Symbol
Description
Warning
A warning notice with this symbol indicates high voltage could result in harm to person.
Warning
A warning notice with this symbol indicates strong laser beam could result in personal injury. A warning notice with this symbol indicates a risk of personal injury.
Warning Caution
A caution notice with this symbol indicates a risk to equipment damage or loss of data.
Caution
A caution notice with this symbol indicates the equipment is static-sensitive.
Important Note
An important note notice with this symbol helps you avoid an undesirable situation or indicates important supplementary information.
Note
A note notice with this symbol indicates additional, helpful, non-critical information.
GUI Conventions Convention
Description
Button name are inside angle brackets. For example, click the button
[]
Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside square brackets. For example, pop up the [New User] window.
/
Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example, [File/Create/Folder].
Huawei Technologies Proprietary xxv
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
1 Equipment Architecture
1
Equipment Architecture
This chapter introduces the architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B.
1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Figure 1-1 The OptiX OSN 3500
The OptiX OSN 3500 can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
1 Equipment Architecture
Figure 1-2 shows the components when the equipment seating in a 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet. The OptiX OSN 3500 is composed of cabinet, side panel, power distribution unit, subrack, fixing frame for order wire, boards, and cables. 1
2
6
3
4
5
1. Cabinet 4. Fixing frame for order wire
2. Power distribution unit 5. Lower subrack
Figure 1-2 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-2
3. Upper subrack 6. Side panel
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
1 Equipment Architecture
1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500 Figure 1-3 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 2500.
Figure 1-3 The OptiX OSN 2500
The OptiX OSN 2500 can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, or in a standard 19-inch cabinet. Figure 1-4 shows the components when the equipment seating in a 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet. The OptiX OSN 2500 is composed of cabinet, side panel, power distribution unit, subrack, fixing frame for order wire, boards, and cables.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
1 Equipment Architecture
1
2
7 3
4
5
6
1. Cabinet 5. Middle subrack
2. Power distribution unit 6. Lower subrack
3. Upper subrack 7. Side panel
Figure 1-4 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-4
4. Fixing frame for order wire
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
1 Equipment Architecture
1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A The OptiX OSN 1500A is a case-shape equipment. It can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, a standard 19-inch cabinet, or be hanged on the wall. Figure 1-5 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Figure 1-5 The OptiX OSN 1500A
1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B The OptiX OSN 1500B is a case-shape equipment. It can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, a standard 19-inch cabinet, or be hanged on the wall. Figure 1-6 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Figure 1-6 The OptiX OSN 1500B
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
2 Cabinet
2
Cabinet
This chapter introduces the dimensions, technical specifications, and the configuration of the cabinet equipped by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, or OptiX OSN 1500B.
2.1 Types Table 2-1 shows the cabinets that can house the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B. Table 2-1 Types of the cabinets for OptiX OSN products
Cabinet
ETSI 300-mm deep
ETSI 600-mm deep
OptiX OSN 3500
9
9
OptiX OSN 2500
9
9
9
OptiX OSN 1500A
9
9
9
OptiX OSN 1500B
9
9
9
Product
19-inch cabinet
Notes: These cabinets should be provided by Huawei. Figure 2-1 shows the appearance of the ETSI cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-1
Access network cabinet
Hanging
9
9 9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
2 Cabinet
Figure 2-1 The 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
2 Cabinet
2.2 Cabinet Configuration There are indicators and a power distribution unit on the top of ETSI cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-2. 1 2 Power Critical MajorMinor
Power distribution unit
1. Cabinet indicators
2. Power distribution unit
Figure 2-2 The ETSI cabinet configuration
2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators Table 2-2 shows the description of cabinet indicators. Table 2-2 Description of ETSI cabinet indicators
Indicator
Status
Description
Power indicator - Power (green)
On
The equipment is powered on.
Off
The equipment is not powered on.
On
There are critical alarms.
Off
There are no critical alarms.
On
There are major alarms.
Off
There are no major alarms.
On
There are minor alarms.
Off
There are no minor alarms.
Critical alarm indicator - Critical (red) Major alarm indicator - Major (orange) Minor alarm indicator - Minor (yellow)
Note: The cabinet indicators are driven by subrack, so you should connect the cable properly and power on the subrack first.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
2 Cabinet
2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit Figure 2-3 shows the power distribution unit.
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
INPUT
SW1/20A SW2/20A SW3/20A SW4/20A
1. Grounding stud 3. RTN1(+) 5. NEG1(–) 7. Left output cable terminal
SW1/20A SW2/20A SW3/20A SW4/20A
2. PGND 4. RTN2(+) 6. NEG2(–) 8. Right output cable terminal
Figure 2-3 The power distribution unit
To the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500A, the left output cable terminal feeds power to the PIU board on the left side of the subrack, and the right output cable terminal to that on the right side of the subrack. Table 2-3 reflects the mapping relation between the terminals and PIU boards. Table 2-3 Mapping relation between terminals and PIU boards
Left terminal
Connected to
Right terminal
Connected to
1
The PIU board on the left of the first subrack
1
The PIU board on the right of the first subrack
2
The PIU board on the left of the second subrack
2
The PIU board on the right of the second subrack
3
The PIU board on the left of the third subrack
3
The PIU board on the right of the third subrack
4
The PIU board on the left of the fourth subrack
4
The PIU board on the right of the fourth subrack
Note: To the OptiX OSN 3500, only terminal 1 and terminal 2 are in use normally. Terminals 3 and 4 can feed power to other equipment, such as COA.
To the OptiX OSN 1500B, the left output cable terminal feeds power to the upper PIU board of the subrack, and the right output cable terminal to the lower PIU board of the subrack.
2.2.3 Other Configuration The cabinet can also house other external case-shape devices.
Uninterruptible power modules (UPM)
The UPM numbered GIE4805S can feed power to the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500 directly. The UPM converts the 220 V AC into –48 V DC, thus providing Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
2 Cabinet
power for equipment without –48 V DC feeding and for storage battery when required.
Case-shape optical amplifier (COA)
The OptiX OSN 3500 and the OptiX OSN 2500 can be configured with two COA at most. The OptiX OSN 1500 can be configured with one COA.
Tone & Data access unit (TDA)
Fiber spooling frame: spooling redundancy fibers inside the cabinet
HUB
2.3 Technical Parameters Table 2-4 shows the technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet. Table 2-4 Technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet
Dimensions (mm)
Weight (kg)
OSN 3500 subracks housed
OSN 2500 subracks housed
OSN 1500 subracks housed
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H)
55
1
2
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H)
79
1
2
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H)
60
2
3
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H)
84
2
3
Up to the cabinet capacity and the number of available power supplies
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H)
70
2
4
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H)
94
2
4
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
3
Subrack
This chapter introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the subrack of:
The OptiX OSN 3500
The OptiX OSN 2500
The OptiX OSN 2500 REG
The OptiX OSN 1500A
The OptiX OSN 1500B
3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500 This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
3.1.1 Structure The subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500 adopts two-layer structure. It is divided into board area, fan area, and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-1.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
1
2
1
3
1. Board area
2. Fan area
3. Fiber routing area
Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
Board area: housing all boards of the OptiX OSN 3500
Fan area: housing three fan modules, enabling heat dissipation function
Fiber routing area: for fiber routing
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
3.1.2 Slot Distribution The subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500 has two layers. The upper layer gives 19 slots for interface boards. The lower layer gives 18 slots for processing boards. Figure 3-2 shows the slot distribution. S L O T 1 9
S L O T 2 0
S L O T 2 2
S L O T 2 1
S L O T 2 3
S L O T 2 4
S L O T 2 5
S L O T 2 6
S L O T 2 7
S L O T 2 8
P I U
P I U
FAN S L O T 1
S L O T 2
S L O T 3
S L O T 4
S L O T 2 9
S L O T 3 0
S L O T 3 1
S L O T 3 2
S L O T 3 3
S L O T 3 4
S L O T 6
S L O T 7
S L O T 8
S L O T 3 6
S L O T 3 7 A U X
FAN S L O T 5
S L O T 3 5
S L O T 9
S L O T 1 0
X C S
X C S
FAN S L O T 1 1
S L O T 1 2
S L O T 1 3
S L O T 1 4
S L O T 1 5
S L O T 1 6
S L O T 1 7
S L O T 1 8
S S C C C C
Fiber Routing
Figure 3-2 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 3500
1. Slots for Interface Boards
Service interface boards: slots 19–26, slots 29–36
2. Slots for Processing Boards
Service processing boards: slots 1–8 and slots 11–17
3. Slots for Other Boards
XCS boards: slots 9–10
SCC boards: slots 17–18 (Slot 17 can also hold a service processing board)
Power interface boards: slot 27 and slot 28
Auxiliary interface boards: slot 37
4. Slot Mapping Table
Table 3-1 shows the slot mapping table which associates slots for processing boards to the slots for its corresponding interface boards. Table 3-1 Slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500
Slot for processing boards
Slots for corresponding interface boards
Slot for processing boards
Slots for corresponding interface boards
Slot 2
Slots 19, 20
Slot 3
Slots 21, 22
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
Slot 4
Slots 23, 24
Slot 5
Slots 25, 26
Slot 13
Slots 29, 30
Slot 14
Slots 31, 32
Slot 15
Slots 33, 34
Slot 16
Slots 35, 36
3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots 1. Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 offers an 80 Gbit/s or 40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity depending on the type of cross-connect boards. Table 3-2 and Table 3-3 associate processing boards to the corresponding slots under the two cross-connect configurations.
N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A)
9
9
9
9
N1/N2SLQ4
9
9
9
9
N1/N2SLD4, N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1SLT1 (Note 1)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1SEP (Note 2) N1SEP1 (Note 2)
Slot 2–slot 5, slot 13–slot 16
9
Slot 17 (1.25 Gbit/s )
9
Slot 13–slot 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Slot 15–slot 16 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 11–slot 12 (10 Gbit/s)
N2SL64
Slot 7–slot 8 (10 Gbit/s)
Slot 5–slot 6 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Boards
Slot 2–slot 4 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Slots and capacity
Slot 1 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Table 3-2 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity)
9
9
9
9
9 9
N1/N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3 N1PL3A
9
N1PQ1, N1PQM
9
N1EFS4
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 9
N1/N2EFS0
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1EFT8（work with interface boards） N1EFT8 (led out from front panel)
Slot 2–slot 5, slot 13–slot 16
Slot 11–slot 12 (10 Gbit/s)
9
Slot 17 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 7–slot 8 (10 Gbit/s)
9
Slot 13–slot 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Slot 15–slot 16 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 5–slot 6 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1/N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1/N2EGR2
Slot 2–slot 4 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Boards
Slot 1 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Slots and capacity
3 Subrack
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1/N2EMR0 (work with interface boards) N1/N2EMR0 (led out from front panel)
9
9
9
9
9
N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDQ1, N1IDL4 (Note 3)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1MR2A
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1LWX
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1MR2C (Note 4)
Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 provides 1–12 optical interfaces. Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when working with interface boards. Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 19–26 or slots 29–36.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A)
9
9
9
9
N1/N2SLQ4, N1/N2SLD4
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1)
9
9
9 9
9
only in slot 6
only in slot 13
9
9
N1/N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3 N1PL3A
9
N1PQ1, N1PQM
9
N1EFS4
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 9
9
9
9
9
9
9 9
N1/N2EFS0 N1/N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1/N2EGR2
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1EFT8 (work with interface boards) N1EFT8 (led out from front panel)
Slot 2–slot 5, slot 13–slot6
9
N1SEP (Note 2) N1SEP1 (Note 2)
Slot 17 (622 Mbit/s )
9
Slot 14–slot 16 (622 Mbit/s )
9
Slot 12–slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11 (10 Gbit/s)
N2SL64
Slot 8 (10 Gbit/s)
Slot 6–slot 7 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Boards
Slot 2–slot 5 (622 Mbit/s )
Slots and capacity
Slot 1 (622 Mbit/s )
Table 3-3 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity)
only in slot 13 9
9
only in slot 6
only in slot 13
9
9
N1/N2EMR0 (work with interface boards)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
N1ADL4, N1ADQ1 (Note 3)
9
9
9
9
9
N1IDQ1, N1IDL4 (Note 3)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1MR2A
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1LWX
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Slot 2–slot 5, slot 13–slot6
only in slot 13
Slot 17 (622 Mbit/s )
Slot 14–slot 16 (622 Mbit/s )
only in slot 6
Slot 12–slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
9
Slot 11 (10 Gbit/s)
9
Slot 8 (10 Gbit/s)
Slot 6–slot 7 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1/N2EMR0 (led out from front panel)
Slot 2–slot 5 (622 Mbit/s )
Boards
Slot 1 (622 Mbit/s )
Slots and capacity
3 Subrack
N1MR2C (Note 4)
Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 provides 1–12 optical interfaces. Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when working with interface boards. Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 19–26 or slots 29–36.
2. Interface Boards
Table 3-4 associates interface boards to the corresponding slots.
N1EU08 (Note)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1OU08
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
(LC interface) (Note) N2OU08 (SC interface) (Note) N1EU04
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-7
Slot 36
Slot 35
Slot 34
Slot 33
Slot 32
Slot 31
Slot 30
Slot 29
Slot 26
Slot 25
Slot 24
Slot 23
Slot 22
Slot 21
Boards
Slot 20
Slots
Slot 19
Table 3-4 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Slot 36
Slot 35
Slot 34
Slot 33
Slot 32
Slot 31
Slot 30
Slot 29
Slot 26
Slot 25
Slot 24
Slot 23
Slot 22
Slot 21
Slot 20
Boards
Slot 19
Slots
3 Subrack
N1MU04
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1D34S
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1D75S
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1D12S
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1D12B
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1ETF8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1EFF8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1ETS8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1TSB8
9
9
Note 1: The OptiX OSN 3500 does not support the N1EU08, N1OU08, and N2OU08 board when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s.
3. Other Boards
Table 3-5 associates cross-connect boards, SCC boards, and auxiliary interface boards to the corresponding slots.
N1GXCS, N2GXCS
9
N1EXCS (Note 1)
9
N1UXCSA( Note 1)
9
N1UXCSB( Note 1)
9 9
N1XCE (Note 2) N1SCC
9
N1GSCC, N2GSCC
9
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-8
Slot 101–slot 102
Slot 59–slot 60
Slot 38–slot 40
Slot 37
Slot 27–slot 28
Boards
Slot 17–slot 18
Slots
Slot 9–slot 10
Table 3-5 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Slot 101–slot 102
Slot 59–slot 60
Slot 38–slot 40
Slot 37
Slot 27–slot 28
Slot 17–slot 18
Boards
Slot 9–slot 10
Slots
3 Subrack
9
N1PIU
9
N1AUX
9
N1FAN (Note 3)
9
61COA, 62COA (Note 3)
Note 1: The OptiX OSN 3500 does not support the N1EXCS, N1UXCSA, N1UXCSB, and N1XCE board when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s. Note 2: The N1XCE can only seat in the extended subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500. Logical slots for the N1XCE are slot 59 and slot 60. Note 3: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots, not physical slots.
3.1.4 Technical Parameters Table 3-6 lists the technical parameters of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-6 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
Dimensions
722 mm (H) x 497 mm (W) x 295 mm (D)
Weight
23 kg (net weight of the subrack, not including spare boards and fans)
3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack.
3.2.1 Structure The subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500 adopts one-layer structure. It is divided into processing board area, interface board area, auxiliary interface area, fan area, and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-1.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack 1
2 3
4 5
1. Auxiliary interface area 4. Fan area
2. Interface board area 5. PIU area
3. Processing board area
Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack
Auxiliary interface area: including alarm interfaces, orderwire interface, clock interfaces, operation and maintenance interfaces, F1 port, serial ports and so on
Processing board area: housing the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500
Interface board area: housing the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 2500
Fan area: housing two fan modules, enabling heat dissipation function
PIU area: housing PIU modules, providing power for the OptiX OSN 2500
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
3.2.2 Slot Distribution
S L O T 15
S L O T 16
S L O T 17
S L O T 18
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
S L O T 14
Interface board
S L O T 13
SAP
S L O T 12
Processing board
S L O T 11 Processing board
CXL16/4/1
CXL16/4/1
Processing board
Processing board
Processing board
Processing board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
S S S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L L L O O O O O O O O O O T T T T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Processing board
The subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500 has eight slots for interface boards and ten slots for processing boards. Figure 3-4 shows the slot distribution. Figure 3-5 shows the access capacity for the subrack.
Fiber routing PIU (Slot 22)
FAN (Slot 24)
FAN (Slot 25)
PIU (Slot 23)
C X L 16
S L O T 12
S L O T 13 1.25 Gbit/s
C X L 16
2.5 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
S S S S S S L L L L L L O O O O O O T T T T T T 9 10 6 7 8 11 622 Mbit/s
622 Mbit/s
S L O T 1
S L S S S O L L L T O O O 5 T T T 2 3 4
2.5 Gbit/s
Figure 3-4 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)
S L S S S O L L L T O O O 14 T T T 1 1 1 S 5 6 7 A P
S L O T 1 8
Fiber routing PIU (Slot 22)
FAN (Slot 24)
FAN (Slot 25)
PIU (Slot 23)
Figure 3-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)
The OptiX OSN 2500 subrack supports slot segmentation. Slots 5, 6, and 7 can be segmented into two half-height slots respectively. After segmentation, the slot distribution is shown in Figure 3-6, and the access capacity is shown in Figure 3-7.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6
S L O T 13
S L O T 14
S L O T 15
S L O T 16
S L O T 17
S L O T 18 Interface board
5
S L O T 12
Interface board
S S S L L L O O O T T T
S L O T 11
Interface board
S S S L L L O O O T T T 8 9 10
Interface board
S L O T 21
CXL16/4/1
S L O T 20
CXL16/4/1
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
S S S S S L L L L L O O O O O T T T T T 1 2 3 4 19
SAP
3 Subrack
7 Fiber routing
PIU (Slot 22)
FAN (Slot 24)
FAN (Slot 25)
PIU (Slot 23)
C X L 16
S L O T 13 1.25 Gbit/s
C X L 16
S L O T 12
2.5 Gbit/s
S S S S L L L L O O O O T T T T 9 10 8 11
2.5 Gbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s
S L O T 7
1.25 Gbit/s
622 Mbit/s
S L O T S S 4 L L O O T T 5 6
622 Mbit/s
S L O T 3
S S L L O O T T 20 21
622 Mbit/s
S L O T 2
622 Mbit/s
S L O T 1
S L O T 19
2.5 Gbit/s
Figure 3-6 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)
S L S S S O L L L T O O O 14 T T T 1 1 1 S 5 6 7 A P
S L O T 1 8
Fiber routing PIU (Slot 22)
FAN (Slot 24)
FAN (Slot 25)
Figure 3-7 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)
1. Slots for Interface Boards
Service interface boards: slots 1–4, slots 15–18
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-12
PIU (Slot 23)
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
2. Slots for Processing Boards
Service processing boards: slots 5–8 and slots 11–13 (before slot segmentation)
Service processing boards: slots 5–8, slots 11–13, and slots 19–21 (after slot segmentation)
CXL boards: slots 9–10
SAP boards: slot 14
3. Slots for Other Boards
SEI auxiliary interface boards: auxiliary interface area
Power interface boards: slot 22 and slot 23
Fan units: slot 24 and slot 25
4. Slot Mapping Table
Table 3-7 shows the slot mapping table which associates slots for processing boards to the slots for its corresponding interface boards. Table 3-7 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 2500
Slot for processing boards
Slots for corresponding interface boards
Slot for processing boards
Slots for corresponding interface boards
Slot 6
Slots 1, 2
Slot 7
Slots 3, 4
Slot 12
Slots 15, 16
Slot 13
Slots 17, 18
Slot 6 (Note)
Slots 2
Slot 20 (Note)
Slots 1
Slot 7 (Note)
Slots 4
Slot 21 (Note)
Slots 3
Note: The slot is half-height slot after slot segmentation.
3.2.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots 1. Processing Boards
Table 3-8 associates processing boards to the corresponding slots. Table 3-8 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500
Slots and capacity
After slot segmentation
Slot 8 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 12 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A), N1/N2SLQ4
9
9
9
9
N1/N2SLD4
9
9
9
9
Boards
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-13
Slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 5–Slot 6 , Slot 19–Slot 20 (622 Mbit/s ) Slot 7, Slot 21 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 7 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 6 (622 Mbit/s )
Slot 5 (622 Mbit/s )
Before slot segmentation
9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
Slots and capacity Slot 6 (622 Mbit/s )
Slot 7 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 8 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 12 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 5–Slot 6 , Slot 19–Slot 20 (622 Mbit/s ) Slot 7, Slot 21 (1.25 Gbit/s )
N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1)
Slot 5 (622 Mbit/s )
Boards
After slot segmentation
Before slot segmentation
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
R1SLD4 9
9
R1PD1
9
9
R1EFT4
9
9
R1SL4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1 N1SEP (work with interface boards) (Note 2) N1SEP1 (led out from front panel) (Note 2)
9
N1/N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1PL3A
9
9
9
N1PQ1, N1PQM
9
9
9
N1EFS4
9
N1/N2EFS0 N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EGR2
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N2EMR0 (work with interface boards)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1EFT8 (work with interface boards) N1EFT8 (led out from front panel)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
Slots and capacity
After slot segmentation
Slot 7 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 8 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 12 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s ) Slot 5–Slot 6 , Slot 19–Slot 20 (622 Mbit/s ) Slot 7, Slot 21 (1.25 Gbit/s )
N2EMR0 (led out from front panel)
Slot 6 (622 Mbit/s )
Boards
Slot 5 (622 Mbit/s )
Before slot segmentation
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1ADL4, N1ADQ1
9
9
9
9
9
N1IDQ1, N1IDL4 (Note 3)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1MR2A
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 9
N1MR2B
9
N1MR2C (Note 4) N1LWX
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Note 1: The SLT1 provides 1–4 optical interfaces when in slots 1–4. The SLT1 provides 1–12 optical interfaces when in slots 7–slot 8 or slot 11–slot 12. The SLT1 provides 1–8 optical interfaces when in slot 13. Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when working with interface boards. Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 1–4 or slots 15–18.
2. Interface Boards
Table 3-9 associates interface boards to the corresponding slots.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
9
N1EU08
9
N1EU08A
9
N1OU08 (LC type)
9
9
9
N2OU08 (SC type)
9
9
9
9
9
Slot 18
Slot 17
Slot 16
Slot 15
Slot 4
Boards
Slot 3
Slot 1
Slots
Slot 2
Table 3-9 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500
9 9
9
9
N1EU04
9
9
9
9
N1MU04
9
9
9
9
N1C34S
9
9
9
9
N1D34S
9
9
9
9
N1D75S
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1D12S
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1D12B
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1ETF8
9
9
9
9
N1EFF8
9
9
9
9
N1ETS8
9
9
9
9
N1TSB8
9
9
3. Other Boards
Table 3-10 associates cross-connect boards, SCC boards, and auxiliary interface boards to the corresponding slots.
Q1CXL1/4/16, Q2CXL1/4/16/1 6A (physical board) (Note 1)
9
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-16
Slot 101–slot 102
SEI area
Slot 50
Slot 24–slot 25
Boards
Slot 14
Slot 9–slot 10
Slots
Slot 22–slot 23
Table 3-10 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
SCC,GSCC (logical board)
slot 82–slot 83
CXL, ECXL (logical board)
slot 80–slot 81
Q1SL1/4/16/16 A (logical board)
9
Q1SAP
Slot 101–slot 102
SEI area
Slot 50
Slot 24–slot 25
Boards
Slot 14
Slot 9–slot 10
Slots
Slot 22–slot 23
3 Subrack
9 9
Q1PIU
9
Q1SEI 9
N1FAN (Note 2)
9
61COA, 62COA (Note 2) 9
CAU (Note 2)
Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 2500. It seats in slot 9 and slot 10. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL, SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 80–81, 82–83 and 9–10. Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots, not physical slots.
3.2.4 Technical Parameters Table 3-11 lists the technical parameters of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500. Table 3-11 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack
Dimensions
472 mm (H) x 447 mm (W) x 295 mm (D)
Weight
17 kg (net weight of the subrack, not including spare boards and fans)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG The OptiX OSN 2500 REG is used to regenerate STM-16 and STM-64 signals. The OptiX OSN 2500 REG uses the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack. The subrack structure and slot assignment are the same as those of the OptiX OSN 2500. This section mainly describes the basic configuration of the REG. Table 3-12 associates OptiX OSN 2500 REG boards to the corresponding slots.
N1SL16
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1SL16A
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1SF16
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Q1CRG
SEI area
Slot 24–slot 25
Boards
Slot 22 –slot 23
Slot 14
Slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 12 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 10
Slot 9
Slot 8 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 7 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 6 622 Mbit/s )
Slots and capacity
Slot 5 (622 Mbit/s )
Table 3-12 The relation between boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG
9 9
Q1SAP
9
Q1PIU
9
N1FAN
9
Q1SEI N1BA2
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1BPA
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N1DCU
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
The OptiX OSN 2500 REG can also be configured with N1BPA, N1BA2, N1DCU and external equipment like UPM and COA as required. For their specific slots, see Table 3-10.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
3.4.1 Structure The OptiX OSN 1500A adopts one-layer structure. It is divided into board area, fan area, PIU area and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-8.
1
2 3 4
6 5
1. Fan area 4. Board area
2. Board area 5. Fiber routing area
3. PIU area 6. Mounting ear
Figure 3-8 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board area: for holding the boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Fan area: housing one fan box, enabling heat dissipation function
PIU area: housing two PIU boards, providing power for the OptiX OSN 1500A
Fiber routing area: for fiber routing
3.4.2 Slot Distribution The OptiX OSN 1500A has 11 slots before slot segmentation. Figure 3-9 shows the slot distribution. Slot 1 Slot 20 FAN
Slot 6
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 7
Slot 13
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 3-9 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (before slot segmentation)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
The OptiX OSN 1500A supports slot segmentation. Slots 12 and 13 can be segmented into two half-height slots respectively. After segmentation, the slot distribution is shown in Figure 3-10. Slot 20 FAN
Slot 1
Slot 11
Slot 6
Slot 2
Slot 12
Slot 7
Slot 3
Slot 13
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 3-10 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (after slot segmentation)
Figure 3-11 shows the access capacity for the OptiX OSN 1500A. Slot XCS A 1
Slot20
Slot 11
XCS B 1.25 Gbit/s Slot 6
Slot 2/12
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 7 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 3/13
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 8 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 4
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 9 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 5
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 10
Figure 3-11 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A
The access capacity for slot 12 or slot 13 is 2.5 Gbit/s before slot segmentation. After slot segmentation, the access capacity for half-height slot 2, slot 3, slot 12 or slot 13 is 1.25 Gbit/s. 1. Slots for Processing Boards
Service processing boards: slots 6–9 and slots 12–13 (before slot segmentation)
Service processing boards: slot 6–9, slot 12–13, slot 2–3 (after slot segmentation)
CXL boards: slots 4–5
EOW boards: slot 9
2. Slots for Other Boards
Auxiliary interface boards: slot 10
Power interface boards: slot 1 and slot 11
Fan units: slot 20
3.4.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots 1. Processing Boards
Table 3-13 associates processing boards to the corresponding slots.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
Table 3-13 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A
N1SEP1 (led out from front panel)
9
R1SLD4, R1SL4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 9
9 9
N1EFS4 R1EFT4
9
9
N1PL3A R1L75S, R1L12S
9
9
R1PD1A, R1PD1B R1PL1A, R1PL1B
Slot 12 (1.25 Gbit/s)
9
Slot 3 (1.25 Gbit/s )
N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A), N1/N2SLQ4, N1/N2SLD4, N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1)
Slot 2 (1.25 Gbit/s)
After slot segmentation Slot 12–slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 9 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Slot 8 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Slot 7 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 6 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Boards
Before slot segmentation
Slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Slots and capacity
9
9
9
9
9
N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EGR2
9
N1EFT8 (led out from front panel)
9
N1/N2EMR0 (led out from front panel)
9
N1ADL4, N1ADQ1
9
N1IDQ1, N1IDL4
9
N1MR2A
9
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-21
9
9
9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
9
N1LWX
9
N1DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA
9
Slot 12 (1.25 Gbit/s)
9
Slot 3 (1.25 Gbit/s )
9
Slot 2 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Slot 9 (1.25 Gbit/s)
9
After slot segmentation Slot 12–slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 8 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1MR2B
Slot 7 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Boards
Slot 6 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Before slot segmentation
9
9
9
Slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Slots and capacity
9
Note: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 1500A provides 1–12 optical interfaces.
2. Other Boards
Table 3-14 associates cross-connect boards, SCC boards, and auxiliary interface boards to the corresponding slots. Table 3-14 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A
Q1CXL1/4/16, Q2CXL1/4/16/16 A (physical board) (Note 1)
9
SCC, GSCC (logical board)
Slots 82, 83
CXL, ECXL (logical board)
Slots 80, 81
Q1SL1/4/16/16A L (logical board)
9
R1EOW
Slot 101–slot 102
Slot 50
Slot 20
Slot 10
Slot 1, slot 11
Slots
Slot 9
Slot 4–slot 5
Boards
9 9
R1AUX, R2AUX
9
R1PIUA
9
R1FAN (Note 1)
9
61COA, 62COA (Note 1)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Slot 50
Slot 20
Slot 10
Slot 9
Slot 1, slot 11
Slots
Slot 4–slot 5
Boards
Slot 101–slot 102
3 Subrack
9
CAU (Note 1)
Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 1500. It seats in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL, SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 80–81, 82–83 and 4–5. Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, 62COA , and CAU are logical slots, not physical slots.
3.4.4 Technical Parameters Table 3-15 lists the technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A equipment. Table 3-15 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Dimensions
131mm mm (H) x 444 mm (W) x 262 mm (D)
Weight
8 kg (including backboard, 2 pieces PIU and fan)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
3.5.1 Structure The OptiX OSN 1500B adopts two-layer structure. It is divided into processing board area, interface board area, auxiliary interface area, fan area, and PIU area, as shown in Figure 3-12.
1
2
3
4
5
7 6
1. Interface board area 4. Processing board area 7. Mounting ear
2. PIU area 5. Auxiliary interface area
3. Fan area 6. Fiber routing area
Figure 3-12 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Processing board area: for holding the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Interface board area: for holding the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Auxiliary interface area: including alarm interfaces, orderwire interface, clock interfaces, operation and maintenance interfaces, F1 port, serial ports and so on
Fan area: housing one fan module, enabling heat dissipation function
PIU area: housing PIU modules, providing power for equipment
Fiber routing area: for fiber routing
ESD area: located above the fan box.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
3.5.2 Slot Distribution The OptiX OSN 1500B has four slots for interface boards on upper layer and ten slots (including slot 4 and slot 5) for processing boards before slot segmentation. Figure 3-13 shows the slot distribution. Figure 3-14 shows the access capacity for the OptiX OSN 1500B. Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 11
Slot 6
Slot 12
Slot 7
Slot 13
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 3-13 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)
Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17
Slot 20 FAN
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 11
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 6
622 Mbit/s
Slot 12
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 7
622 Mbit/s
Slot 13
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 8
622 Mbit/s
Slot 4
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 9
622 Mbit/s
Slot 5
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 3-14 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)
The OptiX OSN 1500B supports slot segmentation. Slots 11, 12, and13 can be segmented into two half-height slots respectively. After segmentation, the slot distribution is shown in Figure 3-15, and the access capacity is shown in Figure 3-16.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 1
Slot 11
Slot 6
Slot 2
Slot 12
Slot 7
Slot 3
Slot 13
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 3-15 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)
Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 1
1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 11 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 6
622 Mbit/s
Slot 20 Slot 2
1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 12 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 7
622 Mbit/s
Slot 3
1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 13 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 8
622 Mbit/s
FAN
Slot 4
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 9
622 Mbit/s
Slot 5
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 3-16 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)
1. Slots for Interface Boards
Service interface boards: slots 14–17
2. Slots for Processing Boards
Service processing board: slots 4–9 and slots 11–13 (before slot segmentation)
Service processing board: slots 1–9 and slots 11–13 (after slot segmentation)
CXL board: slots 4–5
3. Slots for Other Boards
Auxiliary interface boards: slot 10
Orderwire boards: slot 9 (also for the processing boards)
Fan units: slot 20
Power interface boards: slots 18 and 19
4. Slot Mapping Table
Table 3-16 shows the slot mapping table which associates slots for processing boards to the slots for its corresponding interface boards.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
Table 3-16 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Slot for processing boards
Slot for corresponding interface boards
Slot 2
Slot 14
Slot 3
Slot 16
Slot 7
Slot 15
Slot 8
Slot 17
Slot 12
Slots 14, 15
Slot 13
Slots 16, 17
Note: The interface boards of the PD3, PL3, SEP, and SPQ4 boards can only be inserted in corresponding slots in even number. Slot 12 and slot 7 share slot 15 for interface boards. Slot 13 and slot 8 share slot 17 for interface boards.
3.5.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots 1. Processing Boards
Table 3-17 associates processing boards to the corresponding slots. Table 3-17 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s )
9
9
9
R1SLD4 R1SL4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1
9
9
9
9
N1SEP (work with interface boards) (Note 2) 9
N1SEP1 (led out from front panel) (Note 2)
9
9
9
9
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-27
Slot 11,slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 12 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A), N1/N2SLQ4, N1/N2SLD4, N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1)
Slot 11 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 9 (622 Mbit/s)
Slot 8 (622 Mbit/s)
Slot 7 (622 Mbit/s )
Slot 6 (622 Mbit/s )
Boards
After slot segmentation
Before slot segmentation
Slot 1–slot 3 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Slots and capacity
9
9
9
9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
9
9
N1PL3A
9
9
9
N1PQ1, N1PQM
9
9
9
R1PD1
9
9
9
R1PL1A, R1PL1B
9
9
9
9
R1EFT4
9
9
9
9 9
N1EFS4 N1/N2EFS0
9
N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EGR2 N1EFT8 (work with interface boards)
9
N1EFT8 (led out from front panel) N2EMR0 (work with interface boards)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
N2EMR0 (led out from front panel)
9
9
9
N1ADL4, N1ADQ1
9
9
9
N1IDQ1, N1IDL4 (Note 3)
9
9
9
N1MR2A
9
9
9
N1MR2B
9
9
9
9
N1MR2C (Note 4)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-28
Slot 11,slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s )
N1/N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3
Slot 12 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 9 (622 Mbit/s)
Slot 8 (622 Mbit/s)
Slot 7 (622 Mbit/s )
Slot 6 (622 Mbit/s )
Boards
After slot segmentation
Before slot segmentation
Slot 1–slot 3 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Slots and capacity
9
9
9
9
9
9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
Slot 11 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 12 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s )
Slot 9 (622 Mbit/s)
Slot 8 (622 Mbit/s)
Slot 7 (622 Mbit/s )
Slot 6 (622 Mbit/s )
N1LWX
9
9
9
N1DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA
9
9
9
Boards
Slot 11,slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s )
After slot segmentation
Before slot segmentation
Slot 1–slot 3 (1.25 Gbit/s )
Slots and capacity
Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B provides 1–12 optical interfaces. Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when working with interface boards. Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 14–17.
2. Interface Boards
Table 3-18 associates interface boards to the corresponding slots.
Slot 17
Boards
Slot 16
Slot 14
Slots
Slot 15
Table 3-18 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
N1EU08
9
9
N1OU08 (LC type)
9
9
N2OU08 (SC type)
9
9
N1EU04
9
9
N1MU04
9
9
N1D34S
9
9
N1D75S
9
9
9
9
N1D12S
9
9
9
9
N1D12B
9
9
9
9
N1ETF8
9
9
N1EFF8
9
9
N1ETS8
9
N1TSB8
9
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-29
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
3 Subrack
3. Other Boards
Table 3-19 associates cross-connect boards, SCC boards, and auxiliary interface boards to the corresponding slots.
Q1CXL1/4/16, Q2CXL1/4/16/1 6A (physical board) (Note 1)
9
SCC, GSCC (logical board)
Slot 82, 83
CXL, ECXL (Logical board)
Slot 80, 81
Q1SL1/4/16/16 AL (logical board)
9
R1EOW
Slot 101–slot 102
Slot 20
Slot 10
Slot 18, slot 19
Boards
Slot 9
Slot 4–slot 5
Slots
Slot 50
Table 3-19 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
9 9
R1AUX, R2AUX
9
R1PIU
9
R1FAN (Note 2)
9
61COA, 62COA (Note 2)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-30
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Slot 50
Slot 20
Slot 10
Slot 9
Slot 101–slot 102
Boards
Slot 4–slot 5
Slots
Slot 18, slot 19
3 Subrack
9
CAU (Note 2)
Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 1500B. It seats in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL, SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 80–81, 82–83 and 4–5. Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots, not physical slots.
3.5.4 Technical Parameters Table 3-20 lists the technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B. Table 3-20 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Dimensions
221 mm (H) x 444 mm (W) x 263 mm (D)
Weight
9 kg (including backboard, 2 pieces PIU and fan)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
4 Board Classification and List
4
Board Classification and List
This chapter introduces the classification and appearance of the boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.
4.1 Board Classification Most boards of the OptiX OSN products are interchangeable. The same boards can be used either in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 or in the OptiX OSN 1500 equipment. This section classifies the boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 by function. Boards are classified into the following types.
SDH boards
PDH boards
Data processing boards
Cross-Connect and SCC boards
Other boards
4.1.1 SDH Boards Table 4-1 lists the SDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN products.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
4 Board Classification and List
Table 4-1 SDH boards
Product
Description
3500 (40 Gbit/s)
3500 (80 Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500
1500A
1500B
N2SL64
STM-64 processing board
√
√
N1SL16(A)
STM-16 processing board
√
√
√
√
√
√
N2SL16(A)
STM-16 processing board
√
√
√
√
√
√
N1SF16
STM-16 processing board with FEC
√
√
√
√
√
√
N1SLQ4
4 x STM-4 processing board
√
√
√
√
√
N2SLQ4
4 x STM-4 processing board
√
√
√
√
√
N1SLD4
2 x STM-4 processing board
√
√
√
√
√
N2SLD4
2 x STM-4 processing board
√
√
√
√
√
N1SL4
1 x STM-4 processing board
√
√
√
√
√
N2SL4
1 x STM-4 processing board
√
√
√
√
√
N1SLT1
12 x STM-1 processing board
√
√
√
√
√
N1SLQ1
4 x STM-1 processing board
√
√
√
√
√
N2SLQ1
4 x STM-1 processing board
√
√
√
√
√
N1SL1
1 x STM-1 processing board
√
√
√
√
√
N2SL1
1 x STM-1 processing board
√
√
√
√
√
R1SLD4
2 x STM-4 processing board (half-height slot)
√
√
√
R1SL4
1 x STM-4 processing board (half-height slot)
√
√
√
Board
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Product
4 Board Classification and List
Description
3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Board
3500 (80 Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500
1500A
1500B
R1SLQ1
4x STM-1 processing board (half-height slot)
√
√
√
R1SL1
1x STM-1 processing board (half-height slot)
√
√
√
N1SEP1
STM-1 processing board(led out from front panel)
√
√
√
√
√
N1SEP
STM-1 processing board(work with interface boards)
√
√
√
√
√
N1EU08
8 x STM-1 interface board (e)
√
√
√
N1EU08A
8 x STM-1 interface board (e)
√
√
√
N1EU04
4 x STM-1 interface board (e)
N1OU08
8 x STM-1 interface board (o)
√
√
√
N2OU08
8 x STM-1 interface board (o)
√
√
√
N1TSB8
8-channel switching & bridging board
√
√
√
√
√
√
4.1.2 PDH Boards Table 4-2 lists the PDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN products. Table 4-2 PDH boards
Board
Product
3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Description
N1PQ1
63 x E1 processing board
R1PD1 A/B
32 x E1 processing board(75 Ω/120 Ω)
R1PL1 A/B
16 x E1 processing board (75 Ω/120 Ω)
3500 (80 Gbit/s)
√
2500REG
√
2500 √ √
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-3
1500A
1500B √
√
√
√
√
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Board
Product
4 Board Classification and List 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Description
3500 (80 Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500
1500A
1500B
R1L75S
16 x 75Ω E1/T1 switching interface board
√
R1L12S
16 x 120Ω E1/T1 switching interface board
√
N1PQM
63 x T1/E1 processing board
√
√
√
√
N1PD3
6 x E3/DS3 processing board
√
√
√
√
N1PL3
3 x E3/DS3 processing board
√
√
√
√
N1PL3A
3 x E3/DS3 processing board
√
√
√
N1SPQ4
4 x E4/STM-1 processing board
√
√
√
√
N2SPQ4
4 x E4/STM-1 processing board
√
√
√
√
N1D75S
32 x 75Ω E1/T1 switching interface board
√
√
√
√
N1D12S
32 x 120Ω E1/T1 switching interface board
√
√
√
√
N1D12B
32 x 120Ω E1/T1 interface board
√
√
√
√
N1D34S
6 x E3/DS3 PDH interface board
√
√
√
√
N1C34S
3 x E3/DS3 PDH interface board
√
√
√
√
N1MU04
4 x E4/STM-1 interface board
√
√
√
√
N1TSB8
8-channel switching & bridging board
√
√
√
√
√
√
4.1.3 Data Processing Boards Table 4-3 lists the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN products, including ATM boards and Ethernet boards. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
4 Board Classification and List
Table 4-3 Data processing boards
Board
Product
Description
3500 (40 Gbit/s)
3500 (80 Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500
1500A
1500B
√
√
N1EFS4
4-port FE processing board with L2 switching
√
√
√
N1EFS0
FE processing board with L2 switching
√
√
√
√
N2EFS0
FE processing board with L2 switching
√
√
√
√
N1EGS2
2-port Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board
√
√
√
√
√
N2EGS2
2-port Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board
√
√
√
√
√
N1EGT2
2-port Gigabit Ethernet transparent transmission board
√
√
√
√
√
N1EFT8
16-port Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board
√
√
√
√
√
R1EFT4
4-port Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board
√
√
√
N1EGS4
4 GE Ethernet transparent transmission and convergence board
√
√
√
√
√
N1EMR0
12 FE ＋ 1 GE Ethernet processing board with RPR function
√
√
√
√
√
N2EMR0
12 FE ＋ 1 GE Ethernet
√
√
√
√
√
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Board
Product
4 Board Classification and List
Description
3500 (40 Gbit/s)
3500 (80 Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500
1500A
1500B
processing board with RPR function
N1EGR2
2-port GE processing board with RPR function
√
√
√
√
√
N2EGR2
2-port GE processing board with RPR function
√
√
√
√
√
N1EFF8
8-port 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board
√
√
√
√
N1ETF8
8-port 10/100M BaseT fast Ethernet interface board
√
√
√
√
N1ETS8
8-port 10/100M BaseT Ethernet interface switching board
√
√
√
√
N1ADL4
1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board
√
√
√
√
√
N1ADQ1
4 x STM-1ATM service processing board
√
√
√
√
√
N1IDL4
1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board with IMA (Note 1)
√
√
√
√
√
N1IDQ1
4 x STM-1 ATM service processing board with IMA (Note 1)
√
√
√
√
√
N1MST4
4 x multi-service transparent transmission processing board
√
√
√
√
√
Note 1: IMA is a kind of function named inverse multiplexing ATM.
4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
4 Board Classification and List
Table 4-4 lists the cross-connect and SCC boards supported by the OptiX OSN products. Table 4-4 Cross-Connect and SCC boards
Board
Product
Description
3500 (40 Gbit/s)
3500 (80 Gbit/s)
N1GXCSA
Cross-connect and timing board (40 Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order)
√
N2GXCSA
Cross-connect and timing board (40 Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order)
√
N1EXCSA
Enhanced cross-connect and timing board (80Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order)
√
N1UXCSA
Super cross-connect and timing board (80 Gbit/s higher order, 20 Gbit/s lower order)
√
N1UXCSB
Super cross-connect and timing board (80 higher order, 20 Gbit/s lower order, supporting extended subrack)
√
N1XCE
Lower order cross-connect and timing board for extended subrack (1.25 Gbit/s)
√
Q1CXL1
STM-1 line, system control, cross-connect and timing board (20 Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order)
2500REG
2500
√
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-7
1500A
√
1500B
√
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Board
Product
4 Board Classification and List
Description
3500 (40 Gbit/s)
3500 (80 Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500
1500A
1500B
Q1CXL4
STM-4 line, system control, cross-connect and timing board (20 Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order)
√
√
√
Q1CXL16
STM-16 line, system control, cross-connect and timing board (20 Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order)
√
√
√
Q2CXL1
STM-1 line, system control, cross-connect and timing board (20 Gbit/s higher order, 20 Gbit/s lower order)
√
√
√
Q2CXL4
STM-4 line, system control, cross-connect and timing board (20 Gbit/s higher order, 20 Gbit/s lower order)
√
√
√
Q2CXL16
STM-16 line, system control, cross-connect and timing board (20 Gbit/s higher order, 20 Gbit/s lower order)
√
√
√
N1SCC
System control and communication board
√
√
N1GSCC
System control and communication board (supporting intelligent features)
√
√
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Board
Product
4 Board Classification and List
Description
3500 (40 Gbit/s)
N2GSCC
System control and communication board (supporting intelligent features)
Q1CRG
System control, communication and timing board for OptiX OSN 2500 REG
3500 (80 Gbit/s)
√
2500REG
2500
1500A
1500B
√
√
4.1.5 Other Boards Table 4-5 lists the other boards supported by the OptiX OSN products. Table 4-5 Other boards
Product Board
3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Description
3500 (80 Gbit/s)
√
2500REG
√
2500
1500A
1500B
N1MR2A
2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
N1MR2B
2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (half-height slot)
N1MR2C
2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (interface area)
√
√
√
N1LWX
Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board
√
√
√
√
√
N1BPA
Booster amplifier and pre-amplifier board
√
√
√
√
√
√
N1BA2
Booster amplifier board
√
√
√
√
√
√
N1DCU
Dispersion compensate board
√
√
√
N1PIU
Power interface board
√
√
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-9
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Product Board
4 Board Classification and List 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Description
3500 (80 Gbit/s)
2500REG
√
2500
Q1PIU
Power interface board
R1PIU
Power interface board
R2PIU
Power interface board
N1FAN
Fan board
R1FAN
Fan board
N1FANA
Fan board (large power)
R1EOW
Orderwire board
Q1SEI
Extended signal interface board
√
√
Q1SAP
System auxiliary processing board
√
√
N1AUX
System auxiliary interface board
R1AUX
1500A
1500B
√ √ √
√
√
√
√ √
√
√
√
System auxiliary interface board
√
√
R2AUX
System auxiliary interface board
√
√
61COA/62CO A
External case-shape optical amplifier
√
√
√
√
√
√
TDA
External tone & data access board
√
√
√
√
√
√
UPM
External uninterruptible power modules
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
4.2 Board Appearance Figure 4-1 shows the board appearance of the OptiX OSN products.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
4 Board Classification and List
3
1
2
1. Optical interface
2. Ejector lever
3. Printed circuit board
Figure 4-1 Board appearance
Caution: Always wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD wrist strap is well grounded, thus to prevent the static from damaging the board.
Warning: It is strictly forbidden to stare into the optical interface board and the optical interface, lest the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
5
SDH Boards
This chapter introduces the SDH boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of:
Functionality
Principle
Front panel
Parameter configuration
Protection configuration
Version description
Technical parameters
The SDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 are listed in Table 4-1.
5.1 SL64 The SL64 is the 1 x STM-64 processing board. Table 5-1 lists the slots for the SL64 board. Table 5-1 Slots for the SL64
Product
SL64
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 7–8, 11–12
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 8, 11
OptiX OSN 2500
Not available
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Slots 5–8, 11–13
OptiX OSN 1500A
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500B
Not available
5.1.1 Functionality Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
Functionality
SL64
Basic function
Receive/Transmit one STM-64 optical signal.
Optical interface specifications
Support the I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2 and V-64.2b (used with BA, PA, and DCU) optical module, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.691.
Optical module specifications
Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules.
Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed wavelength output, which can access DWDM equipment directly.
Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces.
Service processing
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the concatenated services at levels from VC-4-4c to STM-64-4c.
Overhead processing
Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-64 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte. Support tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function.
Alarms and performance events
Provide abundant alarms and performance events.
K byte processing
Be able to process multiple sets of K bytes. One SL64 board can support up to four multiplex section protection (MSP) rings.
REG specifications
Support setting and querying REG working mode.
Protection schemes
Support two-fiber and four-fiber MSP, linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). Support shared optical path protection of MSP ring and SNCP ring, or that of two MSP rings.
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth upgrade of board software.
5.1.2 Principle Figure 5-1 shows the principle block diagram of the SL64.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards O/E conversion module O/E conversion
STM-64
E/O conversion
STM-64
Backplane
SDH overhead processing module
MUX/ DEMUX
Logic control module
+5 V +3.3 V
Cross-connect unit Cross-connect unit
SCC unit
Power module
+3.3 V (standby)
+3.3 V
Figure 5-1 The principle block diagram of the SL64
1. In Receive Direction
The O/E conversion module includes E/O (O/E) conversion and MUX/DEMUX part. The O/E conversion converts the received 10.71 Gbit/s optical signals into electrical signals. The DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals into multiple parallel low rate electrical signals, and clock signal is recovered at the same time. This module also responsible for detecting R_LOS alarms. The multiple low rate electrical signals demultiplexed are transferred to the SDH overhead processing module. The SDH overhead processing module extracts or inserts overhead byte from/to the received multiple low rate electrical signals, performs pointer processing, and then sends the signals to the cross-connect unit through backplane bus. R_LOF and R_OOF alarms are detected in this module. 2. In Transmit Direction
After being inserted with overhead bytes in the SDH overhead processing module, the parallel low rate electrical signals from the cross-connect unit are then sent to the O/E conversion module. The O/E conversion module multiplexes the received parallel low rate electrical signals into high rate electrical signals through the MUX part, converts the signals into OTN optical signals at 10.71 Gbit/s. Signals are then sent to fibers for transmission. 3. Auxiliary Units
Logic control module
This unit: −
Generates timing clock and frame header information required by the SL64.
−
implements ALS function.
realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the two optical processing boards constituting the ADM when the SCC is not online.
−
−
control the switching from active cross-connect board to standby one when the Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
active one is faulty.
Power module
Provide the board with required DC voltages.
5.1.3 Front Panel Figure 5-2 shows the front panels of the SL64. SL64 STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SL64
Figure 5-2 The front panel of the SL64
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SL64 board.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. 2. Interfaces
Quantity: single optical interface (one pair) Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces incline down. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
5.1.4 Parameter Configuration The major parameters required by the SL64 are as follows.
J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4 in downstream stations. Table 5-2 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-2 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL64
Service type
Parameter setting of C2
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
34/45 Mbit/s into C-3
E4
140 Mbit/s into C-4
No service
Unequipped
5.1.5 Version Description The versions of the SL64 is N2. The SL64 N2 supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function.
5.1.6 Technical Parameters Table 5-3 list the technical parameters of the SL64. Table 5-4 lists the supported optical interface parameters with fixed wavelength output, complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.692. Table 5-3 Technical parameters of the SL64
Parameter
Description
Bit rate
9.95 Gbit/s
Processing capability
1 x STM-64 standard service or concatenated service
Line code pattern
Non return to zero (NRZ)
Dimensions (mm)
H D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) Weight (kg)
1.12
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-5
W
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
Parameter
Description
Power consumption (W)
30
Type of optical interfaces
I-64.2
S-64.2 b
L-64.2 b
Le-64. 2
Ls-64. 2
V-64.2b (BA+PA+ DCU) (Note)
Wavelength (nm)
1550
1550
1550
1550
1550
1550.12
Transmission distance (km)
0 to 20
2 to 40
30 to 70
30 to 70
80
70 to 120
Launched power (dBm)
–5 to –1
–1 to 2
10 to 14
1 to 4
3 to 5
12 to 15
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–14
–14
–14
–19.5
–21
–23
Receiver overload (dBm)
–1
–1
–3
–9
–9
–7
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum dispersion tolerance (ps/nm)
500
800
1600
1200
1600
800
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10% to 90%
Humidity: 5% to 95%
Humidity: 10% to 100% Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10% to 100%
Note: The bracketed part indicates that V-64.2b optical interface specification consists of booster amplifier (BA), preamplifier (PA) , and the dispersion compensation unit (DCU).
Table 5-4 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with ITU-T G.692
Bit rate
9.95 Gbit/s
Classification code
1 x 29 dB
Dispersion limit (km)
40
Mean launched power (dBm)
–4 to –1
Minimum sensitivity (dBm)
–17
Min. overload point (dBm)
–1
Maximum path allowable dispersion (ps/nm)
800
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
5.2 SF16/SL16 The SL16 is an STM-16 processing board. The SF16 is an STM-16 processing board with FEC function. The two boards are responsible for STM-16 optical signal processing. Table 5-5 lists the slots for the SL16 andSF16. Table 5-5 Slots for the SL16 and SF16
Product
SL16
SF16
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 5–8, 11–14
Slots 5–8, 11–14
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 6–8, 11–13
Slots 6–8, 11–13
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 7–8, 11–12
Slots 7–8, 11–12
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Slots 5–8, 11–13
Slots 5–8, 11–13
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 12–13
Slots 12–13
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 11–13
Slots 11–13
5.2.1 Functionality Functionality
SL16
SF16
Basic function
Receive/Transmit one STM-16 optical signal
Receive/Transmit one OTU1 (2.66 Gbit/s, FEC) optical signal. Support enabling or disabling FEC function.
Optical interface specifications
Support the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je (used with BA), and U-16.2Je (used with BA and PA) optical interface, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.691. Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed wavelength output, which can access DWDM equipment directly.
Optical module specifications
Service processing
Support the Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, and Ue-16.2e optical interface. Support long distance transmission, up to 200 km. Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed wavelength output, which can access DWDM equipment directly.
Support detecting and query of the information on optical modules.
Support detecting and query of the information on optical modules.
Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces.
Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces.
Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces.
Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces.
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the concatenated services at levels from VC-4-4C to STM-16-4C.
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the concatenated services at levels from VC-4-4C to STM-16-4C. The SF16 process overheads and the encapsulation code of FEC in a way complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.709.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
Functionality
SL16
SF16
Overhead processing
Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-16 signals.
Support the overhead processing, performance monitoring, and alarm detecting of the OTU, ODU, and OPU, complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.709.
Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.
Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-16 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.
Alarms and performance events
Provide abundant alarms and performance events. The SF16 provides the alarms and performance events related to OUT, ODU, OPU, and FEC.
K byte processing
Be able to process multiple sets of K byte. One SL16/SF16 board can support up to two MSP rings.
REG specifications
Support setting and querying REG working mode.
Protection schemes
Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). Support shared optical path protection of MSP ring and SNCP ring, or that of two MSP rings.
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth upgrade of board software.
5.2.2 Principle Figure 5-3 shows the principle block diagram of the SF16. The block diagram of the SL16 is the same as that of the SF16 after removing the part surrounded by broken line.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards O/E conv ersion module
STM-16
STM-16
Backplane
O/E conv ersion E/O conv ersion
Digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module
MUX/ DEMUX
SDH ov erhead processing module
Logic control module +5 V +3.3 V
Cross-connect unit Cross-connect unit
SCC unit
Power module
+3.3 V (standby )
+3.3 V
Figure 5-3 The principle block diagram of the SF16
1. In Receive Direction
The O/E conversion module includes E/O (O/E) conversion and MUX/DEMUX part. The O/E conversion converts the received 2.66 Gbit/s FEC optical signals into electrical signals. The DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals into multiple parallel low rate electrical signals, and clock signal is recovered at the same time. This module also responsible for detecting R_LOS alarms. The multiple low rate electrical signals demultiplexed are transferred to the digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module to have FEC packets encapsulated/decapsulated and OTN overheads processed. There are connections with clock and data signals between the digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module, the O/E conversion module, and the SDH overhead processing module. Alarms related to FEC overhead processing are detected in this module. The SDH overhead processing module extracts or inserts overhead byte from/to the received multiple low rate electrical signals, performs pointer processing, and then sends the signals to the cross-connect unit through backplane bus. R_LOF and R_OOF alarms are detected in this module. 2. In Transmit Direction
After being inserted with overhead bytes in the SDH overhead processing module, the parallel low rate electrical signals from the cross-connect unit are then sent to the digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module. The digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module performs FEC coding and OTN overhead inserting to the multiple low rate signals, and then sends it to the O/E conversion module. The O/E conversion module multiplexes the received parallel low rate electrical signals into high rate electrical signals through the MUX part, converts the signals into OTN optical signals with FEC at 2.66 Gbit/s. Signals are then sent to fibers for transmission.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
3. Auxiliary Units
Logic control module
This unit: generates timing clock and frame header information required by the SF16/SL16.
−
−
implements ALS function.
realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the two optical processing boards constituting the ADM.
−
control the switching from active cross-connect board to standby one when the active one is faulty.
−
Power module
Provide the board with required DC voltages.
5.2.3 Front Panel Figure 5-4 shows the front panels of the SL16 and the SF16. SL16 STAT ACT PROG SRV
SF16 STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
SL16
SF16
Figure 5-4 The front panel of the SL16 and the SF16
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SL16/SF16.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. 2. Interfaces
Quantity: single optical interface (one pair) Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The optical interfaces of the SF16 are not swappable. The SL16 can use swappable optical modules for easy maintenance.
5.2.4 Parameter Configuration The major parameters required by the SL16/SF16 are as follows.
J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Table 5-6 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-6 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SF16/SL16
Service type
Parameter setting of C2
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
34/45 Mbit/s into C-3
E4
140 Mbit/s into C-4
No service
Unequipped
5.2.5 Version Description The version of the SF16 is N1, which is the only version existed. The board can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500 REG, and OptiX OSN 1500. The board can be set to be under ADM mode or REG mode. The versions of the SL16 are N1 and N2. The two versions realize board functions in the same way. The N2SL16 supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command must be delivered in NM after hardware Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
replacing is fulfilled.
Note: If the TCM function is enabled on version N2, the command of replacing the version N2 with version N1 will fail.
The board named SL16A is not hot swappable for optical module, because the optical interfaces are equipped with fixed optical modules.
5.2.6 Technical Parameters Table 5-7 and Table 5-8 list the technical parameters of the SL16 and the SF16 respectively. Table 5-9 lists the supported optical interface parameters with fixed wavelength output, complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.692. Table 5-7 Technical parameters of the SL16
Parameter
Description
Bit rate
2.488 Gbit/s
Processing capability
1 x STM-16 standard service or concatenated service
Line code pattern
Non return to zero (NRZ)
Dimensions (mm)
H D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
W
Weight (kg)
1.10
Power consumption (W)
20
Type of optical modules
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
L-16.2 Je
V-16.2 Je (BA)
U-16.2Je (BA+PA)
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1310
1550
1550
1550
1550.12
Transmission distance (km)
0–2
2–15
15–40
40–80
80–1 00
80–14 0
140–17 0
Launched power (dBm)
–10 to –3
–5 to 0
–2 to 3
–2 to 3
5 to 7
14
14
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–18
–18
–27
–28
–28
–28
–33
Receiver overload (dBm)
–3
0
–9
–9
–9
–9
–10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
Parameter
Description
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10% to 90%
Humidity: 5% to 95%
Humidity: 10% to 100%
Humidity: 10% to 100%
Table 5-8 Technical parameters of the SF16
Parameter
Description
Bit rate
2.66 Gbit/s
Processing capability
1 x STM-16 standard service or concatenated service
Line code pattern
Non return to zero (NRZ)
Dimensions (mm)
H D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
W
Weight (kg)
1.09
Power consumption (W)
26
Specification of optical interfaces (Note 1)
Ue-16.2c
Ue-16.2d
Ue-16.2e
FEC+BA(14)+P A
FEC+BA(17)+PA
FEC+BA(17)+R A+PA
Wavelength (nm)
G.692-compliant wavelength with 100 GHz interval
G.692-compliant wavelength with 100 GHz interval
G.692-compliant wavelength with 100 GHz interval
Transmission distance (km)
178
189
200
Launched power (dBm) (Note 2)
–2 to +3
–2 to +3
–2 to +3
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) (Note 2)
–31 (APD)
–31 (APD)
–31 (APD)
Receiver overload (dBm) (Note 2)
–9 (APD)
–9 (APD)
–9 (APD)
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) (Note 2)
10
10
10
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C Humidity: 10% to 90%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
Parameter
Description
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 5% to 95%
Humidity: 10% to 100% Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10% to 100%
Note 1: The bracketed numbers indicate corresponding parameters. For example, “BA(14)” indicates the optical power is 14 dBm after signals are amplified by BA. “FEC+BA+PA” indicates that the specifications of optical interfaces consist of FEC, BA, and PA. Note 2: Parameters listed in the above table are of the optical module only, but not of amplifiers. Table 5-9 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with G.692
Bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Classification code
8 x 22 dB
5 x 30 dB
3 x 33 dB
Dispersion limit (km)
170
170
640
Mean launched power (dBm)
–2 to 3
5 to 7
–5 to –1
Minimum sensitivity (dBm)
–28
–28
–28
Min. overload point (dBm)
–9
–9
–9
Maximum path allowable dispersion (ps/nm)
3500
3500
12800
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 The SL4 is the 1 x STM-4 processing board. The SLD4 is the 2 x STM-4 processing board. The SLQ4 is the 4 x STM-4 processing board. The three boards are responsible for:
the receiving/transmitting of STM-4 optical signals
the O/E conversion of STM-4 optical signals
the extracting/inserting of overhead byte
the detecting of alarms in the line
Table 5-10 lists the slots for the SL4, SLD4, and SLQ4. Table 5-10 Slots for the SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4
Product
SL4
SLD4
SLQ4
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–17
Slots 1–8, 11–17
Slots 5–8, 11–14
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–16
Slots 1–8, 11–16
Slots 6–8, 11–13
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 5–8, 11–13
Slots 7–8, 11–13
Slots 7–8, 11–12
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 12–13
Slots 12–13
Slots 12–13
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 11–13
Slots 11–13
Slots 11–13
5.3.1 Functionality Functionality
SL4
SLD4
SLQ4
Basic function
Receive/Transmit one STM-4 optical signal.
Receive/Transmit two STM-4 optical signals.
Receive/Transmit four STM-4 optical signals.
Optical interface specifications
Support the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2 optical interface, which comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.957.
Optical module specifications
Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces. Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.
Service processing
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the VC-4-4C concatenated services.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
Functionality
SL4
SLD4
SLQ4
Overhead processing
Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-4 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.
Alarms and performance events
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration.
Protection schemes
Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). Support MSP or SNCP shared optical path protection.
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
5.3.2 Principle Figure 5-5 shows the principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 (1 x STM-4 optical signal is processed). Backplane
STM-4
STM-4
O/E conversion module E/O conversion module
Cross-connect unit
Frame synchronous and scrambler module
Overhead processing module Cross-connect unit
Logic control module +5 V +2.7 V
Power module
SCC
-48 V
+3.3 V +3.3 V ( Standby )
Figure 5-5 The principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-16
+3.3 V
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
1. In Receive Direction
The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-4 optical signal into STM-4 electrical signal while extracting clock signal simultaneously, then sends the clock signal and STM-4 electrical signal to the frame synchronous and scrambler module, where the R_LOS alarm is checked. The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received STM-4 electrical signal, converts it into parallel signal, and sends it to the overhead processing module, where the R_LOF and R_OOF alarm signals are checked. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the received STM-4 signal, and then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane bus. 2. In Transmit Direction
Signals from the cross-connect unit are inserted with overhead bytes in the overhead processing unit, and then sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module. The frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for the received STM-4 electrical signal, and then sends it to the E/O conversion module after descrambling. The E/O conversion module converts the received STM-4 electrical signal into STM-4 optical signal, and then sends it to the fiber for transmission. 3. Auxiliary Units
Logic control module
This unit: generates timing clock and frame header information required by the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4.
−
−
implements ALS function.
realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the two optical processing boards constituting the ADM.
−
control the switching from active cross-connect board to standby one when the active one is faulty.
−
Power module
Provide the board with required DC voltages.
5.3.3 Front Panel Figure 5-6 shows the front panels of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
SLD4
SL4
SLQ4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
STAT ACT PROG SRV
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
OUT OUT1
OUT1
IN1
IN1
IN
OUT2
OUT2
IN2
IN2
OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
SLD4
SL4
SL4
SLD4
SLQ4
SLQ4
Figure 5-6 The front panel of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. 2. Interfaces
Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the SL4, two pairs for the SLD4, and four pairs for the SLQ4 Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies maintenance.
5.3.4 Parameter Configuration The major parameters required by the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 are as follows.
J1 Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Set C2 according to the actual service type. Table 5-11 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-11 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
Service type
Parameter setting of C2
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
34/45 Mbit/s into C-3
E4
140 Mbit/s into C-4
No service
Unequipped
5.3.5 Version Description The versions of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 are N1 and N2. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B). The two versions realize board functions in the same way. N2SLQ4 supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command must be delivered in NM after hardware replacing is fulfilled.
Note: If the TCM function is enabled on version N2, the command of replacing the version N2 with version N1 will fail.
5.3.6 Technical Parameters Table 5-12 lists the technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4. Table 5-12 Technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4
Parameter Bit rate
Description SL4
SLD4
622080 kbit/s
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-19
SLQ4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
Parameter
Description SL4
SLD4
SLQ4
Processing capability
1 x STM-4 standard or concatenated service
2 x STM-4 standard or concatenated service
4 x STM-4 standard or concatenated service
Line code pattern
Non return to zero (NRZ)
Connector
LC
Dimensions (mm)
H D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
W
Weight (kg)
1.00
1.01
1.04
Power consumption (W)
15
15
16
Optical module type
I-4
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1310
1550
1550
Transmission distance (km)
0–2
2–15
15–40
40–80
80–100
Launched power (dBm)
–15 to –8
–15 to –8
–3 to 2
–3 to 2
–3 to 2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–23
–28
–28
–28
–33
Receiver overload (dBm)
–8
–8
–8
–8
–8
8.2
8.2
10
10
10
Minimum extinction ration (dB) Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10% to 90%
Humidity: 5% to 95%
Humidity: 10% to 100%
Humidity: 10% to 100%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1 The SLT1 is a 12 x STM-1 optical processing board. The SLQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 optical processing board. The SL1 is a 1 x STM-1 optical processing board. The three boards are responsible for:
the receiving/transmitting of STM-1 optical signals
the O/E conversion of STM-1 optical signals
the extracting/inserting of overhead byte
the detecting of alarms in the line
Table 5-13 shows the slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1. Table 5-13 Slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1
Product
SLT1
SLQ1
SL1
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–17
Slots 1–8, 11–17
Slots 1–8, 11–17
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–16
Slots 1–8, 11–16
Slots 1–8, 11–16
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 5–8, 11–13
Slots 5–8, 11–13
Slots 5–8, 11–13
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 12–13
Slots 12–13
Slots 12–13
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 11–13
Slots 11–13
Slots 11–13
Note: To the OptiX OSN 3500 with 40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity, the first to fourth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 1–5 or 14–16, and the first to twelfth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 6–8 or 11–13. To the OptiX OSN 3500 with 80 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity, the first to eighth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 1–5 or 14–16, and the first to twelfth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 6–8 or 11–13. To the OptiX OSN 2500, the first to fourth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in slot 5 or 6, the first to twelfth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 7–8 or 11–12, and the first to eight optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in 13th slot.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
5.4.1 Functionality Functionality
SLT1
SLQ1
SL1
Basic function
Receive/Transmit twelve STM-1 optical signals.
Receive/Transmit four STM-1 optical signals.
Receive/Transmit one STM-1 optical signal.
Optical interface specifications
Support the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2 optical interface, which comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.957. Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules.
Optical module specifications
Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces. Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.
Service processing
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services. Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals.
Overhead processing
Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.
Alarms and performance events
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration.
Protection schemes
Support two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast.
Maintenance
Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
5.4.2 Principle Figure 5-7 shows the principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1 (1 x STM-1 signal is processed).
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards Backplane
STM-1
STM-1
O/E conversion module E/O conversion module
Cross-connect unit
Frame synchronous and scrambler module
Overhead processing module Cross-connect unit
Logic control module +5 V +2.7 V
Power module
SCC
-48 V
+3.3 V +3.3 V ( Standby )
+3.3 V
Figure 5-7 The principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
1. In Receive Direction
The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-1 optical signal into STM-1 electrical signal while extracting clock signal simultaneously, then sends the clock signal and STM-1 electrical signal to the frame synchronous and scrambler module, where the R_LOS alarm is checked. The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received STM-1 electrical signal, converts it into parallel signal, and sends it to the overhead processing module, where the R_LOF and R_OOF alarm signals are checked. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the received STM-1 signal, and demultiplexes it into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane. 2. In Transmit Direction
The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit are multiplexed into an STM-1 signal and inserted with overhead bytes in the overhead processing unit, and then are sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module. The frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for the received STM-1 electrical signal, and then sends it to the E/O conversion module after descrambling. The E/O conversion module converts the received STM-1 electrical signal into STM-1 optical signal, and then sends it to the fiber for transmission. 3. Auxiliary Units
Logic control module
This unit: Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
generates timing clock and frame header information required by the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1.
−
−
implements ALS function.
realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the two optical processing boards constituting the ADM.
−
control the switching from active cross-connect board to standby one when the active one is faulty.
−
Power module
Provide the board with required DC voltages.
5.4.3 Front Panel Figure 5-8 shows the front panels of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1. SL1
SLQ1
SLT1
STAT AC T PROG SRV
STAT ACT PROG SRV
STAT ACT PROG SRV CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
OUT
OUT1
OUT2 IN2
IN
IN1
OUT3 IN3 OUT4
OUT2
IN4 OUT5
IN2
IN5 OUT6 IN6
OUT3
OUT7 IN7
IN3
OUT8 IN8 OUT9
OUT4
IN9 OUT10
IN4
IN10 OUT11 IN11 OUT12 IN12
SLT1
SLT1
SL1
SLQ1
SLQ1
SL1
Figure 5-8 The front panel of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. 2. Interfaces
Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the SL1, four pairs for the SLQ1, and twelve pairs for the SLT1 Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces of the SLQ1 and the SL1 incline down. The optical interfaces of the SLT1 are vertical to the front panel, indenting by 20 mm. The SL1, SLQ1, and SLT1 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies maintenance.
5.4.4 Parameter Configuration The major parameters required by the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1 are as follows.
J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Table 5-14 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-14 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
Service type
Parameter setting of C2
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
34/45 Mbit/s into C-3
E4
140 Mbit/s into C-4
No service
Unequipped
5.4.5 Version Description The versions of the SLQ1 and SL1 are N1 and N2, which can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B). The two versions realize board functions in the same way. N2SLQ1 supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command must be delivered in NM after hardware replacing is fulfilled. The version of the SLT1 is N1, which is the only version existed. The board can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B).
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
Note: If the TCM function is enabled on version N2, the command of replacing the version N2 with version N1 will fail.
5.4.6 Technical Parameters Table 5-15 lists the technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1. Table 5-15 Technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1
Parameter
Description SLT1
SLQ1
SL1
4 x STM-1
1 x STM-1
Bit rate
155.52 Mbit/s
Processing capability
12 x STM-1
Line code pattern
Non return to zero (NRZ)
Dimensions (mm)
H D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
W
Weight (kg)
1.22
1.04
1.00
Power consumption (W)
15
15
14
Optical interface type
I-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Ve-1.2
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1310
1550
1550
Transmission distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Launched power (dBm)
–15 to –8
–15 to –8
–5 to 0
–5 to 0
–3 to 2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–23
–28
–34
–34
–34
Receiver overload (dBm)
–8
–8
–10
–10
–10
Minimum extinction ration (dB)
8.2
8.2
10
10
10
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Humidity: 10% to 90%
Humidity: 5% to 95%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
Parameter
Description SLT1
SLQ1
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
SL1
Humidity: 10% to 100%
Humidity: 10% to 100%
5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1 The R1SLD4 is a 2 x STM-4 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SL4 is a 1 x STM-4 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SLQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SL1 is a 1 x STM-1 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SLD4 and the R1SL4 are responsible for:
The receiving or transmitting of STM-4 optical signals
The O/E conversion of STM-4 optical signals
The extracting or inserting of overhead byte
The detecting of alarms in the line
The R1SLQ1 and the R1SL1 are responsible for:
The receiving or transmitting of STM-1 optical signals
The O/E conversion of STM-1 optical signals
The extracting/inserting of overhead byte
The detecting of alarms in the line
Table 5-16 lists the slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1 in OSN products. Table 5-16 Slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1
Product
R1SLQ1
R1SL1
R1SLD4
R1SL4
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 5–7, 19–21
Slots 5–7, 19–21
Slots 7, 21
Slots 5–7, 19–21
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 6–9, 12–13
Slots 6–9, 12–13
Slots 6–9, 12–13
Slots 6–9, 12–13
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-27
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
Product
R1SLQ1
R1SL1
R1SLD4
R1SL4
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1–3, 6–9, 11–13
Slots 1–3, 6–9, 11–13
Slots 1–3, 11–13
Slots 1–3, 6–9, 11–13
5.5.1 Functionality Functionality
R1SL4
R1SLD4
R1SLQ1
R1SL1
Basic function
Receive/Transmit 1 x STM-4 optical signal.
Receive/Transmit 2 x STM-4 optical signals.
Receive/Transmit 4 x STM-1 optical signals.
Receive/Transmit 1 x STM-1 optical signal.
Optical interface specifications
Support the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2 optical interface, which comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.957.
Support the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2 optical interface, which comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.957.
Service processing
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and VC-4-4C concatenated services.
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services.
Overhead processing
Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-4 signals.
Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals.
Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination).
Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination).
Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.
Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.
Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and SNCP.
Support linear MSP and SNCP.
Protection schemes
Support MSP or SNCP shared optical path protection. Optical module specifications
Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces. Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.
Alarms and performance events
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration.
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-28
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
5.5.2 Principle The principle of the R1SLD4/R1SL4 is the same as that of the SL4. Refer to Figure 5-5 for details. The principle of the R1SLQ1/R1SL1 is the same as that of the SL1. Refer to Figure 5-7 for details.
5.5.3 Front Panel Figure 5-9 shows the front panels of the R1SLD4 and R1SL4. Figure 5-10 shows the front panels of the R1SLQ1 and R1SL1.
R1SL4
R1SLD4
Figure 5-9 The front panel of the R1SL4 and R1SLD4
R1SLQ1
R1SL1
Figure 5-10 The front panel of the R1SL1 and R1SLQ1
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-29
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
The R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 are half-slot optical processing boards whose height is half of the SL4’s. They are used when the slots of the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 are segmented. 1. Indicators There are four indicators on the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. 2. Interfaces
Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the R1SL4, two pairs for the R1SLD4, four pairs for the R1SLQ1, and one pair for the R1SL1 Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces are vertical to the front panel, indenting by 20 mm. The R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies maintenance.
5.5.4 Parameter Configuration The major parameters required by the half-slot optical processing boards are as follows.
J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Set C2 according to the actual service type. Table 5-17 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-17 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for half-slot optical processing boards
Service type
Parameter setting of C2
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
34/45 Mbit/s into C-3
E4
140 Mbit/s into C-4
No service
Unequipped
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-30
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
5.5.5 Version Description The version of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 is N1, which is the only version existed. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B after slot segmentation.
5.5.6 Technical Parameters The optical interface parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL are the same as that of the SL4 and SL1. Refer to Table 5-12 and Table 5-15 for details. Table 5-18 lists other technical parameters. Table 5-18 Technical parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1
Parameter
Description R1SL4
R1SLD4
Bit rate
622.080 Mbit/s
Processing capability
1 x STM-4 standard or concatenated services
Line code pattern
Non return to zero (NRZ)
R1SLQ1
R1SL1
155.520 Mbit/s 2 x STM-4 standard or concatenated services
Dimensions (mm)
4 x STM-1 standard services
1 x STM-1 standard services
H D
111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
W
Weight (kg)
0.34
0.36
0.4
0.34
Power consumption (W)
10
11
12
10
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10% to 90%
Humidity: 5% to 95%
Humidity: 10% to 100%
Humidity: 10% to 100%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8 The SEP1 is an 8 x STM-1 electrical signal processing board, with two STM-1 electrical interfaces on the front panel. The EU08 and OU08are interface boards of the SEP1. The TSB8 is an electrical interface switching & bridging board. Table 5-19 lists the slots for the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8 in OSN products. Table 5-19 Slot for the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8
Product
SEP1 (Led out from front panel)
SEP (Work with interface boards)
EU08/OU08
TSB8
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–6, 13–16
Slots 2–5, 13–16
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
Slots 19, 35
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–6, 13–16
Slots 2–5, 13–16
Not available
Slots 19, 35
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 5–8, 11–13
Slots 6–7, 12–13
Slots 3, 15, 17
Slots 1, 17
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 12–13
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 11–13
Slots 12–13
Slots 14, 16
Slots 14
When used with different interface boards and electrical interface switching & bridging boards, the SEP1 has different access ability, as listed in Table 5-20. Table 5-20 Different access abilities of the SEP1
When worked with
Access ability
None
Access and process 2 x STM-1 electrical signals.
EU08
Access and process 8 x STM-1 electrical signals.
OU08
Access and process 8 x STM-1 optical signals.
EU08 and TSB8
Access and process 8 x STM-1 electrical signals, and achieve 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection.
Caution: The two interfaces on the front panel of the SEP1 are unavailable when used with interface boards.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-32
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
Caution: The EU08 and OU08 can only be used when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s in OptiX OSN 3500. When the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s, the EU04 can be used to work with the SEP1.
5.6.1 Functionality Functionality Basic function
Optical interface specifications
SEP1
EU08/OU08
8 x STM-1 processing board
_
EU08: 8 x STM-1 electrical interface board OU08: 8 x STM-1 optical interface board The OU08 supports the I-1 and S-1.1 optical interface, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.957.
TSB8 8-channel electrical interface switching & bridging board
_
Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Optical module specifications
Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces. Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.
Service processing
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services. Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals.
Overhead processing
Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.
Alarms and performance events Protection scheme
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration. Realize TPS protection when the SEP1 works with interface boards and switching & bridging boards. Support two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and SNCP. Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast.
Maintenance
Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-33
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
5.6.2 Principle Figure 5-11 shows the principle block diagram of the SEP1 (1 x STM-1 signal is processed). Backplane
STM-1 O/E signal Interface module
Data recovery module
STM-1 O/E signal
Cross-connect unit
Frame synchronous and scrambler module
Overhead processing module Cross-connect unit
Logic control module +3.3 V （Standby） +5 V +2.7 V
Power module
SCC
+3.3 V（Standby）
-48 V
+3.3 V
Figure 5-11 The principle block diagram of the SEP1
1. In Receive Direction
The interface module accesses STM-1 electrical signals (for optical signals, O/E conversion is needed), and the data recovery module recovers clock signals. Then, the cock signal and E4/STM-1 electrical signals are sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module. The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received STM-1 electrical signals, converts it into parallel signals, and then sends them to the overhead processing module. The overhead processing module extracts the overhead bytes from the STM-1 signals, and demultiplexes the signals into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane. 2. In Transmit Direction
The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit are multiplexed into STM-1 signals in the overhead processing unit, and sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module after being inserted with overhead bytes. The frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for the received STM-1 electrical signals, and then sends them to the interface module after scrambling. The interface module sends the STM-1 electrical signals to the cable for transmission. When optical signals are required, the interface module adopts the OU08, where the signals are sent to fiber after E/O conversion.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
3. Auxiliary Units
Logic control module
This unit:
−
communicates with the SCC and other boards through Ethernet ports.
−
collects and reports alarms and performance events.
−
process the configuration command from NM.
Power module
Provide the board with required DC voltages.
5.6.3 Front Panel Figure 5-12 shows the front panels of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8. SEP1
EU08
OU08
TSB8
STAT ACT PROG SRV
EU08
EU08
OUT1IN1OUT2IN2OUT3IN3OUT4IN4OUT5IN5OUT6IN6OUT7IN7OUT8IN8
SEP1
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2
SEP1
OU08
OU08 (LC)
TSB8
TSB8
Figure 5-12 The front panel of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SEP1.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-35
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the EU08, OU08, or TSB8. 2. Interfaces
Quantity: The SEP1 has two pair of 75-ohm SMB interface, with which the SEP1 can access two channels of STM-1 electrical signal by itself. Type: SMB connector Table 5-21 lists the quantity and type of the interfaces of the EU08 and OU08. Table 5-21 Interfaces of the EU08 and OU08
Interface
EU08
N1OU08
N2OU08
Quantity
8
8
8
Access ability
8 x STM-1(e)
8 x STM-1(o)
8 x STM-1(o)
Type
8-pair SMB electrical interface
8-pair LC optical interface
8-pair SC optical interface
Swappable optical module
—
Supported
Not supported
The N1OU08 supports swappable optical modules, which simplifies the maintenance to optical modules. There is no service interfaces on the TSB8.
5.6.4 Protection Configuration When used with the EU08 and TSB8, the SEP1 can achieve 1:N TPS protection for 8 x STM-1 electrical signals. Table 5-22 lists the TPS protection of the SEP1 in OSN products. Table 5-22 TPS protection of the SEP1
Product
TPS protection
TPS configuration
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Support two groups of 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection
The board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5. The board in slot 16 protects the boards in slots 13, 14, and 15.
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 2500
Support two groups of 1:1 TPS protection
The board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7. The board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12.
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
—
OptiX OSN 1500A
Not supported
—
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-36
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
Product
TPS protection
TPS configuration
OptiX OSN 1500B
Support one group of 1:1 TPS protection
The board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.
As an equipment level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment. 1. Protection Principle
Figure 5-13 shows the 1:3 TPS protection when the SEP1 is used with the EU08 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500. 8 x STM-1(e)
TSB8
1
2
3
8 x STM-1(e)
EU08
1
2
8 x STM-1(e) Switch control signal
EU08
1
2
EU08
1
2
Cross connect board
SLOT 9/10 Protection SEP1
Working SEP1
Working
Working
SEP1
SEP1
Fail SLOT 2
SLOT 3
SLOT 4
SLOT 5
Figure 5-13 1:3 TPS protection of the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Normal status When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to the SEP1 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the EU08. Switching status When a working SEP1 fails, the working board in each slot is protected in the following manners.
When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3.
When the working board in slot 4 fails, the control switch of the corresponding EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4.
When the working board in slot 5 fails, the control switch of the corresponding EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8 does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-37
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500
When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:3 TPS protection for the SEP1, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-14.
AUX
S L O T 5
S L O T 6
S L O T 7
S L O T 8
S L O T 10
FAN S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O OOOOO OO T T T T T T T T 11 1213141516 1718 SCC Protection 2 Working 2 Working 2 Working 2
Working 1 Working 1 Working 1 Protection 1
S L O T 9
XCS
S L O T 4
TSB8
EU08
S L O T 3
XCS
S L O T 2
FAN
EU08
PIU
S L O T 1
EU08
TSB8
FAN
PIU
S L O T 37
EU08
S S S SS SS S L L L LL LL L O O O OO OO O T T T TT TT T 2930313233343536
EU08
S S L L O O T T 27 28
EU08
S S S S SS S S L L L L LL L L O O O O OO O O T T T T TT T T 1920212223242526
Fiber routing
Figure 5-14 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500
In the Figure 5-14, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5, and the board in slot 16 protects the ones in slots 13, 14, and 15. The slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is shown in Table 5-23. Table 5-23 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
Protection SEP1
Slot 2
Slot 16
TSB8
Slot 19
Slot 35
Working SEP1
Slots 3, 4, 5
Slots 13, 14, 15
EU08
Slots 21, 23, 25
Slots 29, 31, 33
3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 2500
When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:1 TPS protection for the SEP1, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-15.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-38
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
S L O T 12
S L O T 13
S L O T 14
Protection 2
SAP
S L O T 11
CXL16
CXL16
Working 1
Protection 1
S S S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L L L O O O O O O O O O O T T T T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Working 2
5 SDH Boards
S L O T 15
S L O T 16
S L O T 17
S L O T 18
Fiber Routing PIU (SLOT22)
FAN (SLOT24)
FAN (SLOT25)
PIU (SLOT23)
Figure 5-15 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 2500
In the above figure, the board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7, and the board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12. The slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is shown in Table 5-24. Table 5-24 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
Protection SEP1
Slot 6
Slot 13
TSB8
Slot 1
Slot 17
Working SEP1
Slot 7
Slot 12
EU08
Slot 3
Slot 15
4. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500B
When the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the SEP1, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-16. Slot 14
TSB8
Slot 15 Slot 16
EU08
Slot 17
Slot 20 FAN
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 1
Slot 11
Slot 2
Slot 12 Protection Slot 7
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 13 Working
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 5-16 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
In the above figure, the board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-39
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
The slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is shown in Table 5-25. Table 5-25 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
Protection group
Protection SEP1
Slot 12
TSB8
Slot 14
Working SEP1
Slot 13
EU08
Slot 16
5.6.5 Parameter Configuration The following parameters should be set through the NM for the SEP1.
J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Table 5-26 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-26 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SEP1
Service type
C2 setting
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3
E4
140 Mbit/s into C-4
No service
Unequipped
5.6.6 Version Description The version of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is N1, which is the only version existed. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B. The OU08 has version N1 and version N2. The optical interface of version N1 is of LC connector, and that of version N2 is of SC connector. The two versions provide the same functions.
5.6.7 Technical Parameters Table 5-27 lists the technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-40
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
5 SDH Boards
Table 5-27 Technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8
Parameter
Description SEP1
EU08
OU08
TSB8
Bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Access capability
2 channels of electrical signals
8 channels of electrical signals
8 channels of optical signals
-
Processing capability
8 x STM-1
-
-
-
Line code pattern
CMI
Connector
SMB
Dimensions (mm)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
NRZ SMB
LC or SC
H D
262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
W
Weight (kg)
0.95
0.41
0.41
0.28
Power consumption (W)
17
11
6
5
Optical module type
-
I-1,
Wavelength (nm)
-
1310
-
Transmission distance (km)
-
0–15
-
Launched power (dBm)
-
–15 to –8
-
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-
–38
-
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10%–90%
Humidity: 5%–95%
Humidity: 10%–100%
Humidity: 10%–100%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-41
S-1.1
-
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
6
PDH Boards
This chapter introduces the PDH boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of:
Functionality
Principle
Front panel
Protection configuration
Parameter configuration
Version description
Technical parameters
The PDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 are listed in Table 4-2.
6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8 The SPQ4 is a 4 x E4/STM-1(e) processing board. The MU04 is a 4 x E4/STM-1 interface board. The SPQ4 works with the MU04 to access and process 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical signals. The SPQ4 and MU04 work with the TSB8 to provide 1:N TPS protection. Table 6-1 lists the slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8. Table 6-1 Slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8
Product
SPQ4
MU04
TSB8
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 2–5, 13–16
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
Slots 19, 35
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 2–5, 13–16
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
Slots 19, 35
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 6–7, 12–13
Slots 1, 3, 15, 17
Slots 1, 17
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A
Not available
Not available
Not available
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
Product
SPQ4
MU04
TSB8
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 12–13
Slots 14, 16
Slot 14
6.1.2 Functionality Functionality
SPQ4
MU04
TSB8
Basic function
4 x E4/STM-1(e) processing board
4 x E4/STM-1(e) interface board
8-channel electrical interface switching & bridging board
Service processing
Access and process 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals. Each path can carry both E4 and STM-1 electrical signals. Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services
Overhead processing
Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals, including B1, B2, K1, K2, M1, F1, and D1–D12. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination), including J1, B3, C2, G1, and H4. Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.
Alarms and performance events
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration.
Protection schemes
The SPQ4 supports TPS protection when working with interface boards and switching & bridging boards. Supports two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP, and SNCP.
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
6.1.3 Principle Figure 6-1 shows the functional block diagram of the SPQ4.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards Backplane
E4/STM-1 electrical signal
E4/STM-1 electrical signal
Interface module (MU04)
Cross-connect unit
Frame synchronous and scrambler module
Data recovery module
Overhead processing module Cross-connect unit
Logic control module
SCC
+3.3 V（Standby） +5 V +2.7 V
Power module
-48 V
+3.3 V
Figure 6-1 The functional block diagram of the SPQ4
1. In Receive Direction
The interface unit (MU04) accesses E4/STM-1 electrical signals, and then the data recovery module recovers the clock signal. Then, the clock signal and E4/STM-1 electrical signals are sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module. The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received E4/STM-1 electrical signals, converts it into parallel signals, and sends them to the overhead processing module. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the received E4/STM-1 signals, and demultiplexes them into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane. 2. In Transmit Direction
The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit is multiplexed into E4/STM-1 signals in the overhead processing unit, and then sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module after being inserted with overhead bytes. The frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for the received E4/STM-1 electrical signals, and then sends them to the interface unit after scrambling. The interface unit sends the received E4/STM-1 electrical signals into the cable for transmission. 3. Auxiliary Units
Logic control module
This unit: −
communicates with the SCC and other boards through Ethernet ports.
−
collects and reports alarms and performance events.
−
process the configuration command from NM.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
Power module
Provide the board with required DC voltages.
6.1.4 Front Panel Figure 6-2 shows the front panel of the SPQ4 and the MU04. SPQ4
MU04
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
SPQ4
SPQ4
MU04
MU04
Figure 6-2 The front panel of the SPQ4 and MU04
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SEP1.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the MU04 or TSB8. 2. Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the SPQ4, the SPQ4 should work with the MU04 to input/output E4/STM-1 signals. Table 6-2 describes interfaces on the MU04.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
Table 6-2 Interfaces on the MU04
Interface
MU04
Access service
4 x E4/STM-1
Interface
75 ohm unbalanced interface
Interface type
SMB
6.1.5 Protection Configuration When used with the MU04 and TSB8, the SPQ4 can achieve 1:N TPS protection for 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical signals. Table 6-3 lists the TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-3 The TPS protection of the SPQ4
Product
TPS protection
TPS configuration
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Support two groups of 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection
The board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5. The board in slot 16 protects the boards in slots 13, 14, and 15.
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 2500
Support two groups of 1:1 TPS protection
The board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7. The board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12.
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
—
OptiX OSN 1500A
Not supported
—
OptiX OSN 1500B
Support one group of 1:1 TPS protection
The board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.
As an equipment level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment. 1. Protection Principle
Figure 6-3 shows the 1:3 TPS protection when the SPQ4 is used with the MU04 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards 4× E4/STM-1
TSB8
1
2
3
4× E4/STM-1
MU04
1
2
4× E4/STM-1
Switch control MU04 signal
MU04
1
2
1
2
Crossconnect and timing board Slot 9/10 Protection
Working
Working
Working
SPQ4
SPQ4
SPQ4
SPQ4
Fail Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Figure 6-3 The 1:3 TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Normal status When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to the SPQ4 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the MU04. Switching status When a working SPQ4 fails, the working board in each slot is protected in the following manners.
When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3.
When the working board in slot 4 fails, the control switch of the corresponding MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4.
When the working board in slot 5 fails, the control switch of the corresponding MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8 does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.
2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500
When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:3 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 6-4.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
AUX
S L O T 5
S L O T 6
S L O T 7
S L O T 8
S L O T 10
FAN S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O OOOOO OO T T T T T T T T 11 1213141516 1718 SCC Protection 2 Working 2 Working 2 Working 2
Working 1 Working 1 Working 1 Protection 1
S L O T 9
XCS
S L O T 4
TSB8
EU08
S L O T 3
XCS
S L O T 2
FAN
EU08
PIU
S L O T 1
EU08
TSB8
FAN
PIU
S L O T 37
EU08
S S S SS SS S L L L LL LL L O O O OO OO O T T T TT TT T 2930313233343536
EU08
S S L L O O T T 27 28
EU08
S S S S SS S S L L L L LL L L O O O O OO O O T T T T TT T T 1920212223242526
Fiber routing
Figure 6-4 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500
In Figure 6-4, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5, and the board in slot 16 protects the ones in slots 13, 14, and 15. The slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 is shown in Table 6-4. Table 6-4 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
Protection SPQ4
Slot 2
Slot 16
TSB8
Slot 19
Slot 35
Working SPQ4
Slots 3, 4, 5
Slots 13, 14, 15
EU04
Slots 21, 23, 25
Slots 29, 31, 33
3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 2500
When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:1 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 6-5.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
S L O T 12
S L O T 13
S L O T 14
Protection 2
SAP
S L O T 11
CXL16
CXL16
Working 1
Protection 1
S S S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L L L O O O O O O O O O O T T T T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Working 2
6 PDH Boards
S L O T 15
S L O T 16
S L O T 17
S L O T 18
Fiber Routing PIU (SLOT22)
FAN (SLOT24)
FAN (SLOT25)
PIU (SLOT23)
Figure 6-5 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 2500
In Figure 6-5, the board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7, and the board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12. The slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 is shown in Table 6-5. Table 6-5 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
Protection SPQ4
Slot 6
Slot 13
TSB8
Slot 1
Slot 17
Working SPQ4
Slot 7
Slot 12
MU04
Slot 3
Slot 15
4. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500B
When the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 6-6. Slot 14
TSB8
Slot 15 Slot 16
EU08
Slot 17
Slot 20 FAN
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 1
Slot 11
Slot 2
Slot 12 Protection Slot 7
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 13 Working
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 6-6 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
In the above figure, the board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
The slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 is shown in Table 6-6. Table 6-6 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
Protection group
Protection SPQ4
Slot 12
TSB8
Slot 14
Working SPQ4
Slot 13
MU04
Slot 16
6.1.6 Parameter Configuration The following parameters should be set through the NM for the SPQ4.
J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.
C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frames and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Table 6-7 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 6-7 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SPQ4
Service type
C2 setting
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3
E4
140 Mbit/s into C-4
No service
Unequipped
6.1.7 Version Description The SPQ4 has version N1 and version N2. The two versions are different in the internal modules used, but realize functions in the same way. The two versions can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B. The two versions can be replaced by each other in products of version V100R003. The version of the MU04 and TSB8 is N1, which is the only version existed. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B.
6.1.8 Technical Parameters Table 6-8 lists the technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
Table 6-8 Technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04
Parameter
Description SPQ4
MU04
Bit rate
139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s
Process capability
Process 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals
Line code pattern
CMI
Connector
None
SMB
Dimensions (mm)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
Access 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals
H D W
Weight (kg)
0.91
0.41
Power consumption (W)
24
2
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10%–90%
Humidity: 5%–95%
Humidity: 10%–100%
Humidity: 10%–100%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S
The PL3 is a 3 x E3/DS3 processing board.
The PD3 is a 6 x E3/DS3 processing board.
The PL3A is a 3 x E3/DS3 processing board with cables led out from the front panel.
The C34S is a 3 x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board.
The D34S is a 6 x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board.
The PL3/PD3 works with the D34S to access and process 3/6 x E3 electrical signals. The PL3 works with the C34S to access and process 3 x E3 electrical signals .The PL3/PD3 and C34S/D34S work with the TSB8 to provide 1:N TPS protection. Table 6-9 lists the slots for the PL3, PL3A, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8 on the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-9 Slots for the PL3, PL3A, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8
Product
PL3/PD3
PL3A
C34S
D34S
TSB8
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 2–5, 13–16
Slots 1–8, 11–17
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
Slots 19, 35
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 2–5, 13–16
Slots 1–8, 11–16
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
Slots 19, 35
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 6–7, 12–13
Slots 5–8, 11–13
Slots 1, 3, 15, 17
Slots 1, 3, 15, 17
Slots 1, 17
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A
Not available
Slots 12–13
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 12–13
Slots 11–13
Slots 14, 16
Slots 14, 16
Slot 14
6.2.1 Functionality Functionality
PL3
PD3
PL3A
C34S
D34S
TSB8
Basic function
3 x E3 processin g board
6 x E3 processin g board
3 x E3 processin g board (led out from front panel)
3x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board
6x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board
8-chann el electrical interface switching & bridging board
Service processing
Access and process E3/DS3 signals.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
Overhead processing
Support the setting and querying of all path overheads at VC-3 level.
Alarms and performance events
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration.
Protection schemes
The PL3/PD3 supports TPS protection when working with interface boards and switching & bridging boards.
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-3 level and locate faults quickly. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset does not affect services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
6.2.2 Principle Figure 6-7 shows the functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A (one channel of E3/DS3 signal is processed). Backplane
D34S/D34S
E3/DS3 Decoder
Mapping
Encoder
Demapping
Interface module D34S/D34S
E3/DS3
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
Logic control module
SCC
+3.3 V （Standby） +5 V +2.7 V
Power module
-48 V
+3.3 V
Figure 6-7 The functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A
1. In Receive Direction
The E3/DS3 signal is accessed, through the interface module, into the decoder, where Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
NRZ data signal and clock signal are recovered after decoding. Then, the signal is sent to the mapping module. In the mapping module, the E3/DS3 signal is mapped asynchronously to C-3, and formed as VC-3 after path overhead processing, as TU-3 after pointer processing, and finally as VC-4 after multiplexing. Then, the signal is sent to the cross-connect unit. Figure 6-8 shows the mapping process. VC-4
x3
TUG-3
TU-3
VC-3
C-3 44736 kbit/s or 34368 kbit/s
Figure 6-8 The mapping and multiplexing process of E3/DS3 signals
2. In Transmit Direction
The demapping module extracts binary data and clock signals from the VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit, and then sends them to the encoder, where E3 or DS3 signals are output. 3. Auxiliary Units
Logic control module This unit: −
Enables the communication between the boards and the SCC.
−
Collects and reports alarms and performance events to the SCC.
−
Processes the configuration command from the SCC.
Power module Provide the board with required DC voltages.
6.2.3 Front Panel Figure 6-9 shows the front panel of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
PL3 STAT ACT PROG SRV
PD3 STAT ACT PROG SRV
PL3A
D34S
STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3
PL3
PL3
PD3
PD3
PL3A
PL3A
D34S
C34S
D34S
Figure 6-9 The front panel of the PD3, PL3, PL3A, C34S and D34S
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the PL3, PD3, and PL3A.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colours (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colours (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – triple colours (red, green, and yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the C34S, D34S or TSB8. 2. Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the PL3 or PD3. The board should work with the D34S to input or output E3/DS3 signals. There are three pairs of 75-ohm SMB unbalanced interfaces on the front panel of the PL3A. Table 6-10 describes interfaces on the D34S. Table 6-10 Interfaces on the D34S
Interface
C34S
D34S
Access service
3 x E3/DS3
6 x E3/DS3
Interface
75 ohm unbalanced interface
Interface type
SMB
Corresponding processing board
PL3, PD3
6.2.4 Protection Configuration The PL3/PD3 works with the C34S/D34S and TSB8 to achieve 1:N protection for 3/6 x E3/DS3 signals. Table 6-11 lists the TPS protection of the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-11 The TPS protection of the PL3/PD3
Product
TPS protection
TPS configuration
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Support two groups of 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection.
The board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5.
Support two groups of 1:1 TPS protection.
The board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7.
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 2500
The board in slot 16 protects the boards in slots 13, 14, and 15.
The board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12. OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported.
—
OptiX OSN
Not supported.
—
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
Support one group of 1:1 TPS protection.
The board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.
As equipment-level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment. 1. Protection Principle
The protection principle of the PL3 is the same as that of the PD3. Figure 6-10 shows the principle of 1:3 TPS for the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500. 6 x E3/DS3
TSB8
1 2
3
6 x E3/DS3
D34S
1
2
6 x E3/DS3
Switch control D34S signal
D34S
1
2
1
2 Crossconnect unit
SLOT 9/10 Protection PD3
Working PD3
Working PD3
Working PD3
Fail Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Figure 6-10 The 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
Normal status When each working board works normally, the service signal is accessed to the corresponding PD3 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the D34S. Switching status When a working PD3 failure is detected, the working board in each slot is protected in the following manners. When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding D34S switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3. When the working board in slot 4 fails, the control switch of the corresponding D34S switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4. When the working board in slot 5 fails, the control switch of the corresponding D34S switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8 does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5. 2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500
Table 6-12 shows the relation between the working board and protection board when the equipment is configured as 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3 or PD3. Table 6-12 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:3 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500
Working board
Protection board
Slot configuration
PL3 (E3)
PL3 (E3)
As shown in Figure 6-11.
PL3 (DS3)
PL3 (DS3)
PD3 (E3)
PD3 (E3)
PD3 (DS3)
PD3 (DS3)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
AUX
S L O T 5
S L O T 6
S L O T 7
S L O T 8
FAN
S L O T 10
S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O OOOOO OO T T T T T T T T 11 1213141516 1718 SCC Protection 2 Working 2 Working 2 Working 2
Working 1 Working 1 Working 1 Protection 1
S L O T 9
XCS
S L O T 4
TSB8
EU08
S L O T 3
FAN
XCS
S L O T 2
EU08
PIU
S L O T 1
EU08
TSB8
FAN
PIU
S L O T 37
EU08
S S S SS SS S L L L LL LL L O O O OO OO O T T T TT TT T 2930313233343536
EU08
S S L L O O T T 27 28
EU08
S S S S SS S S L L L L LL L L O O O O OO O O T T T T TT T T 1920212223242526
Fiber routing
Figure 6-11 Board layout upon 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500
In the figure, slot 2 protects slots 3, 4, and 5, and slot 16 protects slots 13, 14, and 15. Table 6-13 shows the slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8. Table 6-13 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
PL3/PD3 (protection board)
Slot 2
Slot 16
PL3/PD3 (working board)
Slots 3, 4, 5
Slots 13, 14, 15
TSB8
Slot 19
Slot 35
D34S
Slots 21, 23, 25
Slots 29, 31, 33
3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 2500
Table 6-14 shows the relation between the working board and protection board when the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3 or PD3. Table 6-14 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 2500
Working board
Protection board
Slot configuration
PL3 (E3)
PL3 (E3)
As shown in Figure 6-12.
PL3 (DS3)
PL3 (DS3)
PD3 (E3)
PD3 (E3)
PD3 (DS3)
PD3 (DS3)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
S L O T 12
S L O T 13
S L O T 14
Protection 2
SAP
S L O T 11
CXL16
CXL16
Working 1
Protection 1
S S S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L L L O O O O O O O O O O T T T T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Working 2
6 PDH Boards
S L O T 15
S L O T 16
S L O T 17
S L O T 18
Fiber routing PIU (Slot 22)
FAN (Slot 24)
FAN (Slot 25)
PIU (Slot 23)
Figure 6-12 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 n the OptiX OSN 2500
In the figure, slot 6 protects slot7, and slot 13 protects slots 12. Table 6-15 shows the slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8. Table 6-15 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
PL3/PD3 (protection board)
Slot 6
Slot 13
PL3/PD3 (working board)
Slot 7
Slot 12
TSB8
Slot 1
Slot 17
D34S
Slot 3
Slot 15
4. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Table 6-16 shows the relation between the working board and protection board when the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3 or PD3. Table 6-16 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Working board
Protection board
Slot configuration
PL3 (E3)
PL3 (E3)
As shown in Figure 6-13.
PL3 (DS3)
PL3 (DS3)
PD3 (E3)
PD3 (E3)
PD3 (DS3)
PD3 (DS3)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards Slot 14
TSB8
Slot 15 Slot 16
EU08
Slot 17
Slot 20 FAN
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 1
Slot 11
Slot 2
Slot 12 Protection Slot 7
Slot 3
Slot 13 Working
Slot 4 Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 8
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 6-13 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
In the figure, slot 12 protects slot 13. Table 6-17 shows the slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8. Table 6-17 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
Protection group
PL3/PD3 (protection board)
Slot 12
PL3/PD3 (working board)
Slot 13
TSB8
Slot 14
D34S
Slot 16
6.2.5 Parameter Configuration The following parameters should be set on the T2000 for the PL3/PD3. Load indication When the service channel does not process the services it carries, select “Do not load”. Otherwise, select “Load”. Tributary loopback The tributary loopback function is generally used to locate faults for each service channel. The tributary loopback is a diagnosis function, which may interrupt services on relevant channels. Channel service type E3 or DS3 can be selected on the T2000 according to the input service type.
6.2.6 Version Description Version N1 is the only version for the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S, D34S, and TSB8. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B.
6.2.7 Technical Parameters Table 6-18 lists the technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S, and D34S. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
Table 6-18 Technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S
Parameter PL3
PD3
Description PL3A
C34S
D34S
Bit rate
34368 kbit/s or 44736 kbit/s
Processing capability
3x E3/DS3
6x E3/DS3
3x E3/DS3
None
None
Access capability
0
0
3x E3/DS3
3x E3/DS3
6x E3/DS3
Line code pattern
E3:HDB3, DS3:B3ZS
Connector
None
SMB
SMB
Dimensions (mm)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
None
H D W
262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
Weight (kg)
1.00
1.12
1.00
0.31
0.38
Power consumption (W)
15
19
15
2
2
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10%–90%
Humidity: 5%–95%
Humidity: 10%–100% Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10%–100%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B
The PQ1 is a 63 x E1 processing board.
The PQM is a 63 x E1/T1 processing board.
The D75S is a 32 x 75 ohm E1 PDH interface switching board.
The D12S is a 32 x 120 ohm E1/T1 PDH interface switching board.
The D12B is a 32 x 120 ohm E1/T1 PDH interface board.
Table 6-19 lists slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B in the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-19 Slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
Product
PQ1/PQM
D75S/D12S/D12B
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–5, 13–16
Slots 19–26, 29–36
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–5, 13–16
Slots 19–26, 29–36
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 5–7,12–13
Slots 1–4,15–18
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 11–13
Slots 14–17
Table 6-20 shows the difference between the PQ1 and PQM. Table 6-20 Comparison between the PQ1 and PQM
Board
PQ1
PQM
Processing capability
63 x E1
63 x E1/T1
Interface board (providing TPS)
2 x D75S or 2 x D12S
2 x D12S
Interface board (NOT providing TPS)
2 x D12B, 2 x D75S or 2 x D12S
2 x D12B or 2 x D12S
Comparison
6.3.1 Functionality Functionality
PQ1
PQM
D75S/D12S/D12B
Basic function
63 x E1 processing board
63 x E1/T1 processing board
E1/T1 interface board
Service processing
Refer to Table 6-21 for details.
When working with interface boards, the PQ1 can access and process 63 x E1 signals. When working with interface boards, the PQM can access and process 63 x E1/T1 signals.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
Functionality
PQ1
PQM
D75S/D12S/D12B
Overhead processing
Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination) at VC-12 level, such as J2.
Alarms and performance events
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration.
Protection schemes
The PQ1/PQM supports TPS protection when working with interface boards and switching & bridging boards. Support multiple protection schemes, such as SNCP protection, with switching time less than 50ms.
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-12 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
6.3.2 Principle Figure 6-14 shows the functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM (one channel of E1/T1 signal is processed). Backplane
D75S/D12S/ E1/T1 D12B
Decoder
Mapping
Encoder
Demapping
Interface module D75S/D12S/ D12B
E1/T1
Logic control module
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
SCC
+3.3 V（Standby） +5 V +2.7 V
Power module
+3.3 V
Figure 6-14 The functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-23
-48 V
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
1. In Receive Direction
The input E3/DS3 signal enters, through the interface module, the decoder, where HDB3 or B8ZS data signal and clock signal are recovered. Then, the signal is sent to the mapping module. In the mapping module, the E1/T1 signal is mapped asynchronously to C-12, and formed as VC-12 after channel overhead processing, as TU-12 after pointer processing, and finally as VC-4 through multiplexing. Then, the signal is sent to the cross-connect unit. The mapping process is shown in Figure 6-15. x3
VC-4
TUG-3
x7
TUG-2
x3
TU-12
VC-12
C-12 12
2048 kbit/s or 1544 kbit/s
Figure 6-15 The mapping and multiplexing process of E1/T1 signals
2. In Transmit Direction
The demapping module extracts binary data and clock signal from the VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit, and sends the signal to the encoder, where E1 or T1 signals are output. 3. Auxiliary Units
Logic control module
This unit:
−
communicates the board with the SCC.
−
collects and reports alarms and performance events to the SCC.
−
process the configuration command from the SCC.
Power module
Provide the board with required DC voltages.
6.3.3 Front Panel Figure 6-16 shows the front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
PQ1 STAT ACT PROG SRV
PQM
1～8
1～8
1～8
9～16
9～16
9～16
17～24
17～24
17～24
25～32
25～32
25～32
PQM
D75S
D12S
PQM
D75S
D12S
PQ1
PQ1
D12B
D12S
D75S
STAT ACT PROG SRV
D12B
D12B
Figure 6-16 The front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the PQ1 and PQM.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the D75S, D12S, or D12B. 2. Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the PQ1 or PQM. The board should work with the D75S, D12S, or D12B to input/output E1/T1 signals. Table 6-21 shows the difference between the D75S, D12S, and D12B. Table 6-21 Comparison between the D75S, D12S, and D12B
Comparison
Board
Access capability
D75S
D12S
D12B
32 x E1
32 x E1/T1
32 x E1/T1
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards D75S
D12S
D12B
Interface
75 ohm unbalanced interface
120 ohm balanced interface
120 ohm balanced interface
Interface type
DB44
DB44
DB44
Comparison
Board
6.3.4 Protection Configuration The PQ1 and PQM work with the D75S or D12S to achieve 1:N TPS protection for 63 x E1/T1 signals. Table 6-22 shows the TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM in the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-22 The TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM
Product
TPS protection
TPS configuration
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Support one group of 1:N (N≤8) TPS protection
The board in slot 1 protects the ones in slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, and 16.
OptiX OSN 2500
Support one group of 1:N (N≤4) TPS protection
The board in slot 5 protects the ones in slots 6, 7, 12, and 13.
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
—
OptiX OSN 1500A
Not supported
—
OptiX OSN 1500B
Support one group of 1:N (N≤2) TPS protection
The board in slot 11 protects the ones in slots 12 and 13.
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
1. Protection Principle
The protection principle of the PQ1 is the same with that of the PQM. Figure 6-17 shows the protection principle of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
S L O E1 protection bus T 1 9
S L O T 2 0
S L O T 2 1
S L O T 2 2
S L O T 2 3
S L O T 2 4
S L O T 2 5
S L O T 2 6
S L O T 2 9
S L O T 3 0
S L O T 3 1
S L O T 3 2
S L O T 3 3
S L O T 3 4
S L O T 3 5
S L O T 3 6
D75S D75S
D75S D75S
D75S D75S
D75S D75S
D75S D75S
D75S D75S
D75S D75S
D75S D75S
E1 service bus S L O T 1
S L O T 2
S L O T 3
S L O T 4
S L O T 1 3
S L O T 5
S L O T 1 4
S L O T 1 5
S L O T 1 6
Fail Protection
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
Detect
board
fault
Cross-connect and timing board
TPS switching control bus
Figure 6-17 The 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500
When detecting a working PQ1 is faulty, the cross-connect board delivers the service switching command to control the interface board to switch the faulty board to protection board, thus achieving the protection of services. 2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500
When the equipment is configured as with 1:8 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Table 6-23. Table 6-23 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:8 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500
Working board
Protection board
Slot configuration
PQ1 (75 ohm)
PQ1 (75 ohm)
PQ1 (120 ohm)
PQ1 (120 ohm) or PQM
The board in slot 1 is a protection board, protecting the boards in slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, and 16.
PQM
PQM
Figure 6-18 shows the slots for the working and the protection boards.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-27
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
S S L L O O T T 27 28
S S S SS SS S L L L LL LL L O O O OO OO O T T T TT TT T 2930313233343536
S L O T 37
D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S
PIU
D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S D75S
AUX
FAN S L O T 3
S L O T 4
S L O T 5
S L O T 6
S L O T 7
S L O T 8
S L O T 10
FAN S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O OOOOO OO T T T T T T T T 11 1213141516 1718 SCC Working Working Working Working
Working Working Working Working Protection
S L O T 9
XCS
S L O T 2
FAN
XCS
S L O T 1
PIU
S S S S SS S S L L L L LL L L O O O O OO O O T T T T TT T T 1920212223242526
Fiber routing
Figure 6-18 Slot assignment upon 1:8 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 3500
3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 2500
When the equipment is configured as with 1:4 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM, the relation between the working and the protection board is shown in Table 6-24. Table 6-24 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:4 TPS in the OptiX OSN 2500
Working board
Protection board
Slot
PQ1 (75 ohm)
PQ1 (75 ohm)
PQ1 (120 ohm)
PQ1 (120 ohm) or PQM
The board in slot 5 is a protection board, protecting the boards in slots 6, 7, 12, and 13.
PQM
PQM
Figure 6-19 shows the slots for the working and the protection boards.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-28
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
S L O T 12
S L O T 13
S L O T 14
Working
SAP
S L O T 11
CXL16
CXL16
Working
Working
Protection
S S S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L L L O O O O O O O O O O T T T T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Working
6 PDH Boards
S L O T 15
S L O T 16
S L O T 17
S L O T 18
Fiber routing
PIU (Slot 22)
FAN (Slot 24)
FAN (Slot 25)
PIU (Slot 23)
Figure 6-19 Slot assignment upon 1:4 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 2500
4. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500B
When the equipment is configured as with 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Table 6-25. Table 6-25 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
Protection group
PQ1/PQM (protection)
Slot 11
PQ1/PQM (working)
Slots 12, 13
D75S/D12S
Slots 14, 15, 16, 17
6.3.5 Parameter Configuration The following parameter should be set through the NM for the PQ1 or PQM.
J2
It is the VC-12 path trace byte. Successive transmission of the lower order access point identifier through J2 helps the receive end learn that its connection with the transmit end in this path is in continuous connection status.
6.3.6 Version Description Version N1 is the only version of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B.
6.3.7 Technical Parameters Table 6-26 lists the technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B. Table 6-26 Technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
Parameter Bit rate
Description PQ1 PQM 2048 kbit/s
D75S
1544 kbit/s or 2048 kbit/s
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-29
D12S
D12B
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
Parameter
Description PQ1 PQM
D75S
D12S
D12B
Processing capability
63 x E1
63 x E1/T1
Support TPS
Support TPS
Not support TPS
Accessing capability
0
0
32 x E1
32 x E1/T1
32 x E1/T1
Line code pattern
E1: HDB3, T1: B8ZS, AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)
Connector
None
Dimensions (mm)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
None
DB44
DB44
DB44 H D
262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
Weight (kg)
1.01
1.01
0.35
0.35
0.31
Power consumption (W)
19
22
5.5
9
1
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10%–90%
Humidity: 5%–95%
Humidity: 10%–100%
Humidity: 10%–100%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-30
W
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S
The PD1 is a 32 x E1 half-slot processing board. It is used with the L75S or L12S in the OptiX OSN 1500A and used with D75S or D12S in the OptiX OSN 2500 and 1500B.
The PL1A is a 16 x E1(75-ohm) half-slot processing board, with signals led out from the front panel.
The PL1B is a 16 x E1 (120-ohm) half-slot processing board, with signals led out from the front panel.
The L75S is a 16 x E1 interface switching board (75-ohm). It is only used in the OptiX OSN 1500A.
The L12S is a 16 x E1/T1 interface switching board (120-ohm). It is only used in the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Note: When the impedance of interfaces is ignored, the PL1A and PL1B are called PL1 hereinafter.
Table 6-27 lists slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S in the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-27 Slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S
Product
PD1
PL1
L75S/L12S
OptiX OSN 3500 (80Gbit/s)
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 3500 (40Gbit/s)
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 5–7, 19–21
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 2, 12 (after slot segmentation)
Slots 6–9
Slots 6–7
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1–3, 6–8, 11–13 (after slot segmentation)
Slots 6–9
Not available
6.4.1 Functionality Functionality
PD1
PL1
L75S/L12S
Basic function
32 x E1 processing board
16 x E1 processing board
E1/T1 interface board
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
Functionality
PD1
PL1
L75S/L12S
Service processing
When working with interface boards, the PD1 can access and process 32 x E1 signals. The PL1 accesses and processes 16 x E1 signals directly.
Overhead processing
Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination) at VC-12 level, such as J2.
Alarms and performance events
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration.
Protection schemes
The PD1 supports TPS protection when working with interface switching boards. Support multiple protection schemes, such as SNCP protection, with switching time less than 50ms.
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-12 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.
6.4.2 Principle The working principle of the PD1 and PL1 is the same as that of the PQ1. Refer to section 6.3.2 “Principle” for details.
6.4.3 Front Panel Figure 6-20 shows the front panel of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S. PD1 STAT ACT PROG SRV
PL1
L12S
L12S
1-16
PL1
1-16
1-16
PD1
L75S
STAT ACT PROG SRV
L75S
Figure 6-20 The front panel of the PD1, PL1, L12S and L75S
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-32
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the PD1 and PL1.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the L75S and L12S. 2. Interfaces
In the OptiX OSN 1500A, the PD1 works with the L75S or L12S to input/output E1 signals. In the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500B, the PD1 working with the D75S or D12S to input/output E1 signals. Refer to section 6.3.3 for details on the D75S and D12S. Table 6-28 compares the PL1, L75S, and L12S. Table 6-28 Comparison between the PL1, L75S, and L12S
L75S
L12S
PL1
Access capability
16 x E1
16 x E1
16 x E1
Interface
75 ohm unbalanced interface
120 ohm balanced interface
75/120 ohm unbalanced/balance d interface
Interface type
2mmHM
2mmHM
2mmHM
Comparison
Board
6.4.4 Protection Configuration The PD1 and PL1 can only be used in the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The PD1 works with L75S/D75S or L12S/D12S to achieve 1:N protection to E1 signals. Table 6-29 shows the TPS protection of the PD1. Table 6-29 The TPS protection of the PD1
Product
TPS protection
TPS configuration
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Not supported
—
Support two groups of 1:N (N≤2) TPS protection
The board in slot 5 protects the ones in slots 6 and 7.
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 2500
The board in slot 19 protects the ones in slots 20 and 21. OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
—
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-33
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
Product
TPS protection
TPS configuration
OptiX OSN 1500A
Support one group of 1:1 TPS protection
The board in slot 2 protects the one in slot 12.
OptiX OSN 1500B
Support two groups of 1:N (N≤2) TPS protection at most
The board in slot 1 protects the ones in slots 2 and 3. The board in slot 11 protects the ones in slots 12 and 13. The board in slot 6 protects the ones in slots 7 and 8. The latter two groups in the above groups cannot coexist.
1. Protection Principle
The TPS protection principle of the PD1 is the same as that of the PQ1. 2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 2500
The 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 can be achieved after the OptiX OSN 2500 performs slot segmentation. Figure 6-21 shows the board distribution. S S S S S S S L L L L L L L O O O O O O O T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 19 20 21
S S S L L L O O O T T T 8 9 10
S L O T 11
S L O T 12
S L O T 13
S L O T 14
S L O T 15
S L O T 16
S L O T 17
S L O T 18
SAP
S L O T 7
CXL16
S L O T 6
CXL16
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
P2 W2 W2
S L O T 5
P1 W1 W1
Fiber Routing PIU (SLOT22)
FAN (SLOT24)
FAN (SLOT25)
PIU (SLOT23)
Figure 6-21 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500
Table 6-30 lists slots for the working, protection, and interface switching board of the PD1. Table 6-30 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:2 TPS of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
PD1 (protection)
Slots 5
Slot 19
PD1 (working)
Slots 6, 7
Slots 20, 21
D75S/D12S
Slots 2, 4
Slots 1, 3
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500A
The 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 can be achieved after the OptiX OSN 1500A performs slot segmentation. Figure 6-22 shows the board distribution. Slot 1 Slot 20
PD1(P) Slot 2 Slot 3
FAN
Slot 11
Slot 6 L75S(17~32)
Slot 12 PD1(W)
Slot 7 L75S(1~16)
Slot 13
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 6-22 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1
4. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Table 6-31 shows the slot assignment of the working and the protection board of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B. Table 6-31 Slot assignment upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
Before slot segmentation
After slot segmentation
PD1 (protection)
Slot 11
Slot 6
Slot 1
Slot 11
Slot 6
PD1 (working)
Slots 12, 13
Slots 7, 8
Slots 2, 3
Slots 12, 13
Slots 7, 8
D75S/D12S
Slots 15, 17
Slots 15, 17
Slots 14, 16
Slots 15, 17
Slots 15, 17
Note: The protection group with slot 6 and that with slot 11 cannot coexist, because the two groups share protection bus. The OptiX OSN 1500B supports one group of TPS protection to E1 signals before slot segmentation, and supports two groups after slot segmentation.
6.4.5 Parameter Configuration The following parameter should be set through the NM for the PD1 or PL1.
J2
It is the VC-12 path trace byte. Successive transmission of the lower order access point identifier through J2 helps the receive end learn that its connection with the transmit end in this path is in continuous connection status.
6.4.6 Version Description Version N1 is the only version of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B after slot segmentation. The PL1 has PL1A and PL1B. A indicates the interface impedance is 75 ohm, and B indicates the interface impedance is 120 ohm.
6.4.7 Technical Parameters Table 6-32 lists the technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-35
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
6 PDH Boards
Table 6-32 Technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S
Parameter
Description PD1
PL1
Bit rate
2048 kbit/s
2048 kbit/s
Processing capability
32 x E1
Accessing capability
0
Line code pattern
E1: HDB3
Connector
None
Dimensions (mm)
L75S
L12S
16 x E1
TPS
TPS
0
16 x E1 (75-ohm)
16 x E1 (120-ohm)
2mmHM
2mmHM
2mmHM
H D
111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
W
Weight (kg)
0.50
0.45
0.24
0.27
Power consumption (W)
15
6.7
2.7
4.5
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10%–90%
Humidity: 5%–95%
Humidity: 10%–100%
Humidity: 10%–100%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-36
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
7
Data Processing Boards
This chapter introduces data processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500, including Ethernet data processing boards, ATM data processing boards and Ethernet data interface boards as follows.
Ethernet transparent transmission board – EFT4/EFT8/EGT2
Ethernet switching processing board – EFS4/EFS0/EGS2
Ethernet board with RPR function – EMR0/EGR2
ATM service processing board – ADL4/ADQ1
ATM service processing board with IMA function – IDL4/IDQ1
Multi-service transparent transmission processing board – MST4
Ethernet data interface board – EFF8/ETF8/ETS8
The technical details cover:
Functionality
Principle
Front panel
Parameter configuration
Protection configuration
Version description
Technical parameters
Refer to Table 4-3 for the name and descriptions of the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
The EGT2 is a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet transparent transmission board.
The EFT8 is an 8/16-port 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board.
The EFT4 (seated in the half-height slot) is a 4-port 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board.
The EFF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board.
The ETF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board.
Table 7-1 shows the slots for the EGT2, EFT8, EFT4, EFF8, and ETF8 boards. Table 7-1 Slots for the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
Product
EGT2 (Note 1)
EFT8 (led out from front panel) (Note 1)
EFT8 (used with interface boards) (Note 1)
EFT4
EFF8/ETF8
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–16
Slots 1–6, 13–16
Slots 2–5, 13–16
Not supported
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–16
Slots 1–6, 13–16
Slots 13
Not supported
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 5–8, 11–13
Slots 5–8, 11–13
Slots 7, 12–13
Slots 5–7, 19–212
Slots 1, 3, 15, 17
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 12–13
Slots 12–13
Not supported
Slots 2–3, slots 12–13, slots 6–92
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 11–13
Slots 11–13
Slots 12–13
Slots 1–3, slots 11–13, slots 6–92
Slots 14, 16
Note 1: The EGT2 and the EFT8 support bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically according to the capacity of the slots they are seated in. Note 2: These slots are half-height slots.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
7.1.1 Functionality Function
Board
Basic function
EGT2
EFT8
EFT4
Transparent transmission of 2 GE signals
Transparent transmission of 8/16 FE signals
Transparent transmission of 4 FE signals
The EFT8 can access 8 electrical Ethernet signals itself.
Used with an interface board
Used with the ETF8, the EFT8 can access 16 electrical Ethernet signals.
-
-
Used with the EFF8, the EFT8 can access 8 optical Ethernet signals and 8 electrical Ethernet signals. 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX Ethernet optical interface, supporting auto-negotiation function and compliant with IEEE802.3z. Interface specifications
Service frame format
Adopt hot-swappable SFP optical interface to support a transmission distance of 550 m for multimode fiber and 10 km for single-mode fiber (or use 40 km and 70 km optical modules according to the actual condition).
Used with the ETF8, the EFT8 supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX. Used with EFF8 to support 100Base-FX, compliant with IEEE802.3u.
Support 10Base-T/100Base-TX, and comply with IEEE802.3u.
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, supporting 64-byte–9600-byte frames and 9600-byte Jumbo frame. 1.25 Gbit/s;
Maximum uplink bandwidth
2.5 Gbit/s
Number of VCTRUNKs
2
Access up to 24 VC-3s or 126 VC-12s + 18 VC-3s or 63 VC-12s + 21 VC-3s 16
High level data link control (HDLC) Encapsulation format
Link access procedure-SDH (LAPS) Generic Framing Procedure-Frame Mapped (GFP-F)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-3
622 Mbit/s
4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Board
7 Data Processing Boards EGT2
EFT8
EFT4
Mapping mode
VC-3, VC-4, VC-3-Xv, and VC-4-Xv
VC-3, VC-12, VC-12-Xv (X ≤63) and VC-3-Xv (X ≤3)
VC-3, VC-12, VC-12-Xv (X ≤63) and VC-3-Xv (X ≤3)
CAR
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Flow control
GE port based IEEE 802.3X complaint flow control
FE port based IEEE 802.3X complaint flow control
FE port based IEEE 802.3X complaint flow control
Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
ITU-T G.7042, supporting dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and bandwidth protection.
Link stat pass through (LPT)
Support LPT, which can be enabled or disabled.
Testing frame
Support receiving and transmitting Ethernet testing frame.
Ethernet performance monitoring
Support port level Ethernet performance monitoring.
Alarm and performance
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient equipment management and maintenance.
Function
7.1.2 Principle The working principle of the EGT2, EFT8 and EFT4 is the same, except that GE signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-1 takes a GE signal as an example to introduce the working principle of the EGT2.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards Backplane
1000 M
Interface module
Service processing module
Encapsulation module
Mapping module
Crossconnect unit
1000 M
Control and communication module
SCC unit
+3.3 V (standby) +1.5 V +1.8 V +2.5 V +3.3 V
Power module
-48 V
Figure 7-1 Functional block diagram of the EGT2
1. In Receive Direction
The interface module accesses 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX signals from external Ethernet equipment (such as LAN switch and router) and performs decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signals. Then it sends signals to the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, cyclic redundancy code (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. At the encapsulation module, HDLC, LAPS or GFP-F encapsulation is done to the Ethernet frame. After that, the services are mapped into VC-3 or VC-4 at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect unit. 2. In Transmit Direction
Demap the VC-3 or VC-4 signals from the cross-connect unit and send them to the encapsulation module for decapsulation. The service processing module determines the route according to the level of the equipment; it also provides frame delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics. Finally, the interface module performs parallel/serial conversion and encoding to the signals and then sends them out from the Ethernet interface. 3. Auxiliary Units
Control and communication module
Implement communication, control and service configuration functions.
Power module
Provide DC power supply of various voltages for the board.
7.1.3 Front Panel The front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 is shown in Figure 7-2.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
EGT2
EFT8
STAT ACT PROG SRV
ETF8
EFF8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2
LINK ACT
OUT1 IN1
FE1
FE2 FE3 FE1
IN2
FE2
OUT2
FE4
FE5
FE3
FE6
FE4
FE7 FE5 FE6
FE8
EFT4 STAT ACT PROG SRV
FE2
FE7
FE1
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
FE3
FE8
FE4
EGT2
EGT2
EFT8
EFT8
ETF8
EFF8
ETF8
EFF8
EFT4
Figure 7-2 Front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the EGT2, EFT8 and EFT4.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. Except the above common indicators, the EGT2 has other four indicators to show port connection status. Table 7-2 shows the indicators description.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
Table 7-2 Indicators of the EGT2
Indicator
Status
Description
Connection indicator–LINK1 (green)
On
GE port 1 connects with remote equipment successfully
Off
GE port 1 fails to connects with remote equipment
Flashing
GE port 1 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data
Off
GE port 1 and remote equipment do not receive/send data
On
GE port 2 connects with remote equipment successfully
Off
GE port 2 fails to connects with remote equipment
Flashing
GE port 2 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data
Off
GE port 2 and remote equipment do not receive/send data
Data receiving/sending indicator–ACT1 (orange) Connection indicator–LINK2 (green) Data receiving/sending indicator–ACT2 (orange)
Each Ethernet port of the EFT8, EFT4 and ETF8 has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators near the port. The meanings of the indicators are the same as those in Table 7-2. Each Ethernet port on the front panel of the EFF8 has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators. Table 7-3 shows the indicator description. Table 7-3 Indicators of the EFF8
Indicator
Status
Description
Connection indicator–LINK (green)
On
Fiber-port connection succeeded.
Off
Fiber-port connection failed
Flashing
Receiving/Sending data
Off
No data received/sent
Data receiving/sending indicator–ACT (orange)
2. Interfaces
Table 7-4 shows the interface description of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8. Table 7-4 Interfaces of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
Board
EGT2
EFT8
EFT4
EFF8
ETF8
Number of interfaces
2 pairs
8
4
8
8
Access capacity
2 x GE
8 x FE
4 x FE
Interface board
Interface board
Connector
LC
RJ-45
RJ-45
LC
RJ-45
Item
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Item
7 Data Processing Boards Board
Swappable optical module
EGT2
EFT8
EFT4
EFF8
ETF8
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
7.1.4 Parameter Configuration The parameters required by the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4 are as follows:
J1
It is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. The J1 byte is set to “HuaWei SBS” by default.
C2
It is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4.
Ethernet interface setting
Table 7-5 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4. Table 7-5 Parameters for the Ethernet interface of EGT2/EFT8/EFT4
Parameter
Description
Working mode
The EGT2 can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex. The EFT8/EFT4 can be set to auto-negotiation or 10/100 Mbit/s half-duplex or 10/100 Mbit/s full-duplex. Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work under the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be lost or the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic.
LCAS enable
Enable LCAS or not.
Maximum packet length
Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default.
Mapping protocol
Available protocols: HDLC, LAPS and GFP-F. It is preferable to select the default – GFP-F.
7.1.5 Version Description The EGT2 and EFT8 have N1 version only. The EGT2 and EFT8 are applicable to the OptiX the OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, or OptiX OSN1500 (A and B). The EFT4, seated in the half-height slot, has R1 version only. The EFT4 is applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN1500 (A and B). The EFF8 and ETF8 interface boards have N1 version only. The EFF8 and ETF8 are Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, or OptiX OSN1500 (B).
7.1.6 Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 are shown in Table 7-6. Table 7-6 Technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
Parameter
Description EGT2
EFT8
EFT4
ETF8/EFF8
Bit rate
1000 Mbit/s
10/100 Mbit/s
10/100 Mbit/s
10/100 Mbit/s
Processing capacity
2 x GE
16 x FE
4 x FE
8 x FE E/O interface board
Line code pattern
NRZ
Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s)
Connector
LC (SFP)
RJ-45
RJ-45
Interface specifications
IEEE 802.3z compliant
IEEE 802.3u compliant
IEEE 802.3u compliant
IEEE 802.3u compliant
Dimensions (mm)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
Weight (kg)
0.9
1.01
0.53
Power consumption (W)
23
26
14
Optical module type
1000Bas e-SX
1000Bas e-LX
1000Bas e-ZX
1000Bas e-ZX
100BaseFX
100Ba se-FX
Central wavelength (nm)
850
1310
1270–13 55
1480–15 80
1270–13 80
1261–1 360
Transmission distance (km)
0–0.55
0–10
40
70
2
15
Mean launched power (dBm)
–9.5 to –4
–11.5 to –3
–2 to –5
–23
–19 to –14
–15 to –8
Optical receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–17
–19
–4 to –2
–22
–30
–32
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C Humidity: 10%–90%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-9
E: RJ-45 O: LC
EFT8: 0.37 EFF8: 0.44 EFT8: 2 EFF8: 6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Parameter
7 Data Processing Boards Description EGT2
EFT8
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
EFT4
ETF8/EFF8
Humidity: 5%–95%
Humidity: 10%–100%
Humidity: 10%–100%
Note: The EFT8 has no optical interface. The 100 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EFF8. The 1000 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EGT2.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8
The EGS2 is a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet processing board with L2 switching.
The EFS4 is a 4-port FE processing board with L2 switching.
The EFS0 is a FE processing board with L2 switching.
The ETF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board.
The EFF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board.
The ETS8 is an 8-port 10/100M BaseT Ethernet interface switching board.
The Ethernet switching boards are responsible for transparent transmission, convergence and Layer 2 switching of GE/FE services. Table 7-7 shows the slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8 in OptiX OSN products. Table 7-7 Slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8
OptiX OSN product
EGS2 (Note 1)
EFS4 (Note 1)
EFS0 (Note 1)
ETS8
EFF8/ETF8
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–16
Slots 1–8, 11–16
Slots 2–5, 13–16
Slots 21, 33
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–16
Slots 1–8, 11–16
Slots 2–5, 13–16
Slots 21, 33
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 5–8, 11–13
Slots 5–8, 11–13
Slots 6–7, 12–13
Slots 1, 3, 15, 17
Slots 1, 3, 15, 17
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 12–13
Slots 12–13
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 11–13
Slots 11–13
Slots 12–13
Slots 14
Slots 14, 16
Note 1: The EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 supports bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically according to the capacity of the slot they are seated in.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
7.2.1 Functionality EFS4
EFS0
EGS2 (Note 1)
Basic function
Access and process 4 FE signals
Process 8 FE signals
Access and process 2 GE signals
Used with an interface board
-
Used with ETF8, the EFS0 can access 8 electrical FE signals;
-
Function
Board
Used with EFF8, the EFS0 can access 8 optical FE signals; Used with ETS8, the EFS0 can provide TPS protection for 8 electrical FE signals Interface specifications
10Base-T/100Bas e-TX, compliant with IEEE802.3u
Used with ETF8, the EFS0 supports 10Base-T/100Base-T X; Used with EFF8 to support 100Base-FX; compliant with IEEE802.3u
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX Ethernet optical interface; supporting auto-negotiation function and compliant with IEEE802.3z; Adopt hot-swappable SFP optical interface to support a transmission distance of 550 m for multimode fiber and 10 km for single-mode fiber (or use 40 km and 70 km optical modules according to the actual condition).
Service frame format
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1qTAG, supporting 64Byte–9600Byte frame, supporting 9600Byte Jumbo frame.
Maximum uplink bandwidth
622 Mbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
Number of VCTRUNKs
24
24
48
Mapping mode
VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv, VC-3-Xv
VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv, VC-3-Xv
VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv, VC-3-Xv
Encapsulation format
GFP-F
GFP-F
GFP-F
Ethernet Private Line (EPL)
Support Port based transparent transmission and Port+VLAN based virtual private line service.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Function
7 Data Processing Boards Board
Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL)
EFS4
EFS0
EGS2 (Note 1)
Support EVPL, with service frame format being Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG or Multi-protocol Label Switch (MPLS) MartiniOE. Support port or port+ VLAN based MPLS encapsulation and forward.
Ethernet Private LAN (EPLAN)
Support Layer 2 based convergence and point-to-multipoint convergence; Support Layer 2 switching, including local switching and SDH-side switching; Support self-learning of source medium access control (MAC) address. The MAC address table is 16 k and the MAC address aging time can be set and queried through T2000; support configuration of static MAC route; Support virtual bridge (VB)+VLAN based data isolation; Support creating, deleting and querying a VB. The maximum number of VBs is 32 and that of logic ports is 16 for each VB
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN)
Support EVPLAN, in MPLS Martini OE, MPLS MartiniOP and stack VLAN frame encapsulation format.
MPLS
Supported
Supported
Supported
Virtual local area network (VLAN)
IEEE 802.1q/p
IEEE 802.1q/p
IEEE 802.1q/p
VLAN convergence
4000 VLANs
4000 VLANs
4000 VLANs
Rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)
Support broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, compliant with IEEE 802.1w.
IGMP Snooping
Supported
CAR
Port based or port+VLAN based, with the granularity being 64 kbit/s.
Board protection
Support 1+1 backup
Traffic classification
Support port based or port+VLAN based traffic classification.
LCAS (Note 1)
ITU-T G.7042, achieving dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and bandwidth protection
LPT
Support LPT, which can be enabled or disabled.
Flow control
Port based IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control
Testing frame
Support receiving and transmitting Ethernet testing frame.
Loopback
Support inloop at Ethernet port (PHY layer or MAC layer).
Supported
Supported
Support inloop and outloop at VC3 level. Ethernet performance monitoring
Support port level Ethernet performance monitoring.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Function
7 Data Processing Boards Board
Alarm and performance event
EFS4
EFS0
EGS2 (Note 1)
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient equipment management and maintenance.
Note 1: N1EGS2 does not support LCAS function, N2EGS2 supports LCAS function.
7.2.2 Principle The working principle of the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 is the same, except that GE signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-3 shows the functional block diagram of the EGS2 (one GE signal is taken as an example). Backplane
1000 M
1000 M
Interface processing module
Service processing module
Cross-connect unit Encapsulation module
Mapping module Cross-connect unit
Control and communication module
SCC
+3.3 V （Standby） +5 V +2.7 V +3.3 V
Power module
-48 V
Figure 7-3 Functional block diagram of the EGS2
1. In Receive Direction
The interface processing module accesses 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX signals from external Ethernet equipments (such as Ethernet switch and router) and performs decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signals. Then, the signals are sent to the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, cyclic redundancy code (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. In addition, traffic classification is performed according to the service type and configuration requirement (message formats MPLS, Layer 2 MPLS VPN and Ethernet/VLAN are supported), and Tunnel and VC double labels are added according to the service for mapping and transfer. At the encapsulation module, the GFP-F encapsulation is performed to the Ethernet frame. After that, the services are mapped into VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect unit. 2. In Transmit Direction
The VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 signals from the cross-connect unit are demapped and sent Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
to the encapsulation module for decapsulation. The service processing module determines the route according to the level of the equipment, and performs traffic classification according to the service type and configuration requirement. Also, frame delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics are performed by the service processing module. Finally, the signals are sent out from the Ethernet interface after parallel/serial conversion and encoding at interface processing module. 3. Auxiliary Units
Control and communication module
Implement communication, control and service configuration functions.
Power module
Provide DC power supply of various voltages for the board.
7.2.3 Front Panel The front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 is shown in Figure 7-4. EGS2 STAT ACT PROG SRV
EFS0
EFS4
STAT ACT PROG SRV
LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2
ETS8
STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
FE1 FE1
IN2
FE2
OUT2
FE3
FE2
FE4 FE5
FE3
FE6 FE7
EGS2
EGS2
EFS0
EFS4
EFS0
EFS4
FE8
FE4
ETS8
ETS8
Figure 7-4 Front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. Except the above common indicators, the EGS2 has other four indicators to show port connection. Table 7-8 shows the description of the indicators on the EGS2. Table 7-8 Indicators of the EGS2
Indicator
Status
Description
Connection indicator–LINK1 (green)
On
GE port 1 connects with remote equipment successfully.
Off
GE port 1 fails to connect with remote equipment.
Flashing
GE port 1 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data.
Off
GE port 1 and remote equipment do not receive/send data.
On
GE port 2 connects with remote equipment successfully.
Off
GE port 2 fails to connect with remote equipment.
Flashing
GE port 2 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data.
Off
GE port 2 and remote equipment do not receive/send data.
Data receiving/sending indicator–ACT1 (orange) Connection indicator–LINK2 (green) Data receiving/sending indicator–ACT2 (orange)
Each Ethernet port of the EFS4, EFS0 and ETS8 has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators. The meanings of the indicators are the same as those of the EGS2. For indicator description of the interface board, see section 7.1.3. 2. Interfaces
Table 7-9 shows the interface description of EGS2, EFS4, EFS0, and ETS8. Table 7-9 Interfaces of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
EGS2
EFS4
EFS0
ETS8
Number of interfaces
2 pairs
4 pairs
0
8 pairs
Processing capacity
2 x GE
4 x FE
8 x FE
Ethernet interface switching board
Connector
LC
RJ-45
None
RJ-45
Item
Board
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Item
7 Data Processing Boards Board
Swappable optical module
EGS2
EFS4
EFS0
ETS8
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
7.2.4 Protection Configuration The EFS0 is used with the ETS8 and TSB8 to implement 1:1 TPS protection for FE electrical services. Table 7-10 shows the TPS protection of the EFS0. Table 7-10 TPS protection of the EFS0
OptiX OSN product
TPS protection
Configuration
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Support two groups of 1:1 TPS.
The board in slot 2 protects the board in slot 3. The board in slot 16 protects the board in slot 15.
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) OptiX OSN 2500
Support one group of 1:1 TPS.
The board in slot 13 protects the board in slot 12.
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
-
OptiX OSN 1500A
Not supported
-
OptiX OSN 1500B
Support one group of 1:1 TPS.
The board in slot 12 protects the board in slot 13.
1. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500
The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 3500 is shown in Figure 7-5.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
S L O T 5
S L O T 6
S L O T 7
S L O T 8
S L O T 10
FAN S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L O OOOOO OO T T T T T T T T 11 1213141516 1718 SCC Protection 2 Working 2
Working 1 Protection 1
S L O T 9
XCS
S L O T 4
XCS
S L O T 3
PIU
S L O T 2
S L O T 37 AUX
PIU
S L O T 1
FAN
TSB8
TSB8
FAN
S S S SS SS S L L L LL LL L O O O OO OO O T T T TT TT T 2930313233343536 ETS8
S S L L O O T T 27 28
ETS8
S S S S SS S S L L L L LL L L O O O O OO O O T T T T TT T T 1920212223242526
Fiber routing
Figure 7-5 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 3500
In Figure 7-5, slot 2 protects slot 3, and slot 16 protects slot 15. The slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 is shown in Table 7-11. Table 7-11 Slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
EFS0 (protect board)
Slot 2
Slot 16
EFS0 (working board)
Slot 3
Slot 15
TSB8
Slot 19
Slot 35
ETS8
Slot 21
Slot 33
2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 2500
The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 2500 is shown in Figure 7-6.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
S L O T 13
S L O T 14
S L O T 15
SAP
ETS8
S L O T 16
S L O T 17
S L O T 18
TSB8
S L O T 12
EFS0(P)
S L O T 11
CXL16
CXL16
S S S S S S S S S S L L L L L L L L L L O O O O O O O O O O T T T T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EFS0(W)
7 Data Processing Boards
Fiber routing PIU (Slot 22)
FAN (Slot 24)
FAN (Slot 25)
PIU (Slot 23)
Figure 7-6 Board configuration upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 2500
Slot 13 protects slot 12. The ETS8 seated in slot 15 is used with the working EFS0 and the TSB8 seated in slot 17 is used with the protect EFS0. 3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500 B
The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 1500B is shown in Figure 7-7. Slot 14
TSB8
Slot 15 Slot 16
ETS8
Slot 17
Slot 20 FAN
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 1
Slot 11
Slot 6
Slot 2
Slot 12
EFS0 (P)
Slot 7
Slot 3
Slot 13
EFS0 (W)
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 7-7 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OSN 1500
Slot 12 protects slot 13. The ETS8 seated in slot 16 is used with the working EFS0 and the TSB8 seated in slot 14 is used with the protect EFS0.
7.2.5 Parameter Configuration The major parameters required by the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 are as follows:
J1
It is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. The J1 byte is set to “HuaWei SBS” by default.
C2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
It is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4.
Ethernet interface setting
Table 7-12 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0. Table 7-12 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0
Parameter
Description
Tag flag
Tag flag is used to identify the type of packets. Three types of TAG flags are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. (1) When the port is set to be tag aware, the port transmits packets with the Tag flag transparently and discards those without the Tag flag. (2) When the port is set to be access, the port attaches a Tag flag to the packets without Tag flag according to its VLAN ID and discards those with the Tag flag. (3) When the port is set to be hybrid, the port can process packets regardless of the Tag flag, and attach a Tag flag to the packets without the Tag flag according to its VLAN ID.
VLAN ID
VLAN ID of the port.
Working mode
The EGS2 can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex. The EFS4 and EFS0 can be set to auto-negotiation, 10 Mbit/s half-duplex, 10 Mbit/s full duplex, 100 Mbit/s half duplex or 100 Mbit/s full-duplex. The Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work under the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be lost and the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic.
Port type
There are two types: P and PE. Provider edge (PE) is the marginal port of the service provider. Provider (P) is the core network port of the service provider. Port type is needed when configuring EVPL and EVPLAN services.
LCAS enable
Enable LCAS or not.
Maximum packet length
Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default.
Mapping protocol
It is preferable to select the default – GFP-F mapping protocol.
7.2.6 Version Description The EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 have two versions: N1 and N2. N1 is the basic one. In this version, the uplink bandwidth at the SDH side is half that in N2 version. The functions and parameters of N2 version are listed in this section. Table 7-13 shows the version description of the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
Table 7-13 N1 and N2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 boards
Item
Description
Similarity
The working principle and functions of N1 and N2 boards are the same. In N1 version, the uplink bandwidth at the SDH side is half that in N2 version.
Difference
The N1EFSO and the N2EFSO boards are the same in hardware and are different in software. The hardware of the N1EGS2 is different from that of the N2EGS2. The N1EGS2 board does not support LCAS, LPT, RSTP, IGMP Snooping, MPLS (including QinQ), link aggregation (802.3ad), and port rate query function.
NM support
The T2000 differentiates N1 from N2. V100R001 products only support N1 Ethernet processing boards. If N2 boards are inserted, the T2000 takes the board as N1 version by default and uses the boards as N1 boards.
Product support
V100R002 products support N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards. When the T2000 uploads board configuration, all Ethernet processing boards (N1 or N2) are displayed as N1 boards by default. At this time, the boards are used as N1 boards. If you need to use N2 boards, select and configure N2 boards manually. The T2000 can upgrade N1 software to N2 software. V100R003 products support N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards. When the T2000 uploads board configuration, all Ethernet processing boards (N1 or N2) are displayed as N1 boards by default. At this time, the boards are used as N1 boards. If you need to use N2 boards, select and configure N2 boards manually. The T2000 can upgrade N1 software to N2 software. For any product version, the board software can be upgraded from N1 to N2.
Replacement
The N1 boards are only used as N1 boards. For V100R002 and V100R003 products, N2 boards can be used as either N1 boards (displayed as N1 boards on the T2000) or N2 boards (displayed as N2 boards on the T2000). When N2 boards are used as N1 boards, the boards can be upgraded to N2 boards by deleting the original board and adding an N2 board. During the upgrade, services will be interrupted.
The EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B). The ETS8 has only one version. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500B.
7.2.7 Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 are shown in Table 7-14.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
Table 7-14 Technical parameters of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
Parameter
Description EGS2
EFS4
Bit rate
1000 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
Access capacity
2 x GE
Processing capacity
EFS0
ETS8
4 x FE
0
8 x FE Ethernet interface switching board
2 x GE
4 x FE
8 x FE
0
Line code pattern
NRZ
Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s)
Connector
LC (SFP)
RJ-45
None
RJ-45
Interface impedance
-
100 ohm
-
100 ohm
Interface specifications
IEEE 802.3z compliant
IEEE 802.3u compliant
Optical module type
1000Base-SX
1000Base-LX
1000Base-ZX
1000Base-ZX
Central wavelength (nm)
850
1310
1270–1355
1480–1580
Transmission distance (km)
0–0.55
0–10
40
70
Mean launched power (dBm)
–9.5 to –4
–11.5 to –3
–2 to 5
–23
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–17
–19
–4 to 2
–22
Dimensions (mm)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
Weight (kg)
1.04
0.98
0.98
0.37
Power consumption (W)
40/43.2
30
35
2.5
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Humidity: 10%–90%
Humidity: 5%–95%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Parameter
7 Data Processing Boards Description EGS2
EFS4
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
EFS0
Humidity: 10%–100%
Humidity: 10%–100%
Note: The 1000 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EGS2.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-23
ETS8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
7.3 EMR0/EGR2
The EMR0 is a 12 FE + 1 GE Ethernet board with RPR function.
The EGR2 is a 2-port GE processing board with RPR function.
The EMR0 and EGR2 are responsible for accessing and processing Ethernet signals, and constructing resilient packet ring (RPR). Table 7-15 shows the slots for the EMR0 and EGR2 in OptiX OSN products. Table 7-15 Slots for the EMR0 and EGR2
Product
EMR0 (led out from front panel)
EMR0 (used with interface board)
EGR2
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–6, 13–16
Slots 2–3, 13–16
Slots 1–8, 11–16
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–6, 13–16
Slots 2–3, 13–16
Slots 1–8, 11–16
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 5–8, 11–13
Slots 6–7, 12–13
Slots 5–8, 11–13
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 12–13
Not supported
Slots 12–13
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 11–13
Slots 12–13
Slots 11–13
Note: The EMR0 and EGR2 support bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically according to the capacity of the slot they are seated in.
Note: For the OptiX OSN 3500, if SDH cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s, the maximum uplink bandwidth of slots 6–8 and slots 11–13 is 2.5 Gbit/s and that of other slots is 622 Mbit/s. If the SDH cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s, the maximum uplink bandwidth of slots 5–8 and slots 11–14 is 2.5 Gbit/s and that of other slots is 1.25 Gbit/s. For the OptiX OSN 2500, the maximum uplink bandwidth of slots 5–6 is 622 Mbit/s, that of slots 7, 8, 11, 12 is 2.5 Gbit/s, and that of slot 13 is 1.25 Gbit/s.
7.3.1 Functionality Function
Board
Basic function
EMR0
EGR2
Process 12 FE signals and 1 GE signals.
Access and process 2 GE signals.
Support RPR.
Support RPR.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Function
7 Data Processing Boards Board
Used with interface board
EMR0
EGR2
Provide 4 FE ports and 1 GE port.
-
Used with the ETF8, the EMR0 can access 12 electrical FE signals. Used with the EFF8, the EMR0 can access 8 optical FE signals.
Interface specifications
Used with the ETF8, the EMR0 supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX over a transmission distance of up to 100 m. Used with the EFF8, the EMR0 supports 100Base-FX. Comply with IEEE802.3u.
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX Ethernet optical interface, supporting auto-negotiation and compliant with IEEE802.3z. Adopt hot-swappable SFP optical interface to support a transmission distance of 550 m for multimode fiber and 10 km for single-mode fiber (or use 40 km and 70 km optical modules according to the actual condition).
Service frame format
MPLS, supporting 64Byte–9600Byte frame and 9600Byte Jumbo frame
Maximum uplink bandwidth
2.5 Gbit/s
Mapping mode
VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4, VC-4-Xv (X≤8)
Encapsulation format
GFP-F: compliant with ITU-T G.7041
Ethernet private line (EPL)
Support port-base transparent transmission and port+VLAN virtual private line service.
Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL)
Support EVPL with service frame format being Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG or Multi-protocol label switch (MPLS) Martini frame.
2.5 Gbit/s
LAPS: compliant with ITU-T X.86
Support port-based or port+VLAN-based MPLS encapsulation and forward; Support five types of label switch path (LSP): ingress LSP, egress LSP, transit LSP, RPR ingress LSP, and RPR transit LSP. Support 2000 LSPs.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Function
7 Data Processing Boards Board
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN)
EMR0
EGR2
Support EVPLAN service in stack VLAN or Martini frame encapsulation format. Support self-learning of MAC address. The MAC address table has 64,000 entries k and the MAC address aging time can be set and queried through T2000. Support configuration of up to 4000 static MAC routes. Support virtual bridge (VB)+VLAN based data isolation. Support creating, deleting and querying a VB. The maximum number of VBs is 16 and that of logic ports is 32 for each VB.
MPLS
Support MPLS frame format to construct EVPL and EVPLAN services. Support 4000 MPLS labels.
Virtual local area network (VLAN)
IEEE 802.1q/p
IEEE 802.1q/p
VLAN convergence
Support 4000 VLANs.
Support 4000 VLANs.
VLAN switching
Support VLAN tag switching.
Support VLAN tag switching.
Port aggregation
Support the aggregation of up to 12 FE ports.
-
RPR feature
Supported and compliant with IEEE 802.17.
Supported and compliant with IEEE 802.17.
RPR function
Support up to 255 nodes and destination node stripping. Support weighted fair algorithm. Support fiver priority levels: A0, A1, B_EIR, B_CIR and C. Provide auto discovery of topology to show the network status in real time. Support protection modes of steering, wrapping and wrapping + steering. The signal fail time is less than 50ms. Support configuring service route on RPRs manually. Support self-learning function, that is, learning the correspondence between MAC address and node number.
Rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)
Support broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, compliant with IEEE 802.1w.
IGMP snooping
Supported
CAR
Port based or port+VLAN based, with the granularity being 64 kbit/s, ranging from 64 kbit/s to 100 Mbit/s. 2000 CARs are supported.
Traffic classification
Support port-based ,port+VLAN and port + VLAN + PRI based traffic classification.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards Board
Function
EMR0
EGR2
LCAS
ITU-T G.7042, supporting dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and bandwidth protection.
Flow control
Port based IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control.
Echo test frame
Support the Echo function in RPR OAM which tests the link status.
Loopback
Support inloop at Ethernet port (at PHY layer or MAC layer). Support inloop and outloop at VC-3 level.
Ethernet performance monitoring
Support port level Ethernet performance monitoring.
Alarm and performance event
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient equipment management and maintenance.
7.3.2 Principle The working principle of the EMR0 is the same as that of the EGR2, except that GE signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-8 shows the functional block diagram (one 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s signal is taken as an example). Backplane
10/100 Mbit/s 10/100 Mbit/s
Interface module
Ethernet processing module
RPR processing module
Encapsulation and mapping module
Communication and control module
Cross-connect unit Cross-connect unit
SCC unit
+3.3 V (standby) +5 V +2.7 V +3.3 V
Power module
-48 V
Figure 7-8 Functional block diagram of the EMR0
1. In Receive Direction
The interface processing module accesses a 10/100Base-TX/100Base-FX signal from external Ethernet equipment (such as the Ethernet switch and router) and performs decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signal. Then, the signal is sent to the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, cyclic redundancy check (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. In Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-27
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
addition, traffic classification, Layer 2 switching, convergence, MPLS frame processing, RPR inner ring and outer ring mapping are performed according to service type and configuration requirement. The RPR processing module performs IEEE 802.17 based ring network control function. In the encapsulation module, LAPS or GFP-F encapsulation of Ethernet frame is completed. Finally, the signal is mapped into VC-3-Xv or VC-4-Xv at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect unit. 2. In Transmit Direction
The VC-3-Xv or VC-4-Xv signal from the cross-connect unit is demapped and sent to the encapsulation module for decapsulation. In the RPR processing module, IEEE 802.17 based ring network control function is performed. The service processing module determines the route according to the level of the equipment, and performs traffic classification according to the service type and configuration requirement. Also, frame delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics are performed by the service processing module. Finally, the signal is sent out from the Ethernet interface after parallel/serial conversion and encoding at the interface processing module. 3. Auxiliary Units
Control and communication module
Implement communication, control and service configuration functions.
Power module
Provide DC power supply of various voltages for the board.
7.3.3 Front Panel Figure 7-9 shows the front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-28
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
EMR0 STAT ACT PROG SRV LINK ACT
7 Data Processing Boards
EGR2 STAT ACT PROG SRV LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
OUT1 OUT1
IN1
IN1
FE1
OUT2 IN2
FE2
FE3
FE4
EMR0
EGR2
EMR0
EGR2
Figure 7-9 Front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2
1. Indicators
The EGR2 has six board indicators and the EMR0 has eight board indicators as follows:
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
Connection indicator (LINK1/2) – green
Data receiving/sending indicator (ACT1/2) – orange
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. The four indicators of the EGR2 indicating port connection are described in Table 7-16. The LINK and ACT indicators on the EMR0 indicating GE optical interface connection status, as described in Table 7-16.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-29
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
Table 7-16 Indicators of the EGR2
Indicator
Status
Description
Connection indicator–LINK1 (green)
On
GE port 1 connects with remote equipment successfully.
Off
GE port 1 fails to connect with remote equipment.
Flashing
GE port 1 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data.
Off
GE port 1 and remote equipment do not receive/send data.
On
GE port 2 connects with remote equipment successfully.
Off
GE port 2 fails to connect with remote equipment.
Flashing
GE port 2 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data.
Off
GE port 2 and remote equipment do not receive/send data.
Data receiving/sending indicator–ACT1 (orange) Connection indicator–LINK2 (green) Data receiving/sending indicator–ACT2 (orange)
Each FE port on the front panel of the EMR0 also has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators. The meanings of the indicators are the same as those of the EGR2. 2. Interfaces
Table 7-17 shows the interface description of the EMR0 and EGR2. Table 7-17 Interfaces of EMR0 and EGR2
Board
Item
Number of interfaces
EMR0
EGR2
1 pair of GE optical interfaces + 4 FE electrical interfaces
2 pairs of GE optical interfaces
GE: LC (SFP)
Connector
FE: R-J45
Swappable optical module
Supported
GE: LC (SFP) Supported
7.3.4 Parameter Configuration The parameters required by the EMR0 and EGR2 are as follows:
J1
It is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. The J1 byte is set to “HuaWei SBS” by default. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-30
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
C2
It is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4.
Ethernet interface setting
Table 7-18 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2. Table 7-18 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2
Parameter
Description
Tag flag
Tag flag is used to identify the type of packets. Three types of TAG flags are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. (1) When the port is set to be tag aware, the port transmits packets with the Tag flag transparently and discards those without the Tag flag. (2) When the port is set to be access, the port attaches a Tag flag to the packets without Tag flag according to its VLAN ID and discards those with the Tag flag. (3) When the port is set to be hybrid, the port can process packets regardless of the Tag flag, and attach a Tag flag to the packets without the Tag flag according to its VLAN ID.
VLAN ID
Set VLAN ID for external port only.
Working mode
The GE interface can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex. The FE interface can be set to auto-negotiation, 10 Mbit/s half-duplex, 10 Mbit/s full duplex, 100 Mbit/s half duplex or 100 Mbit/s full-duplex. The Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work in the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be lost, or the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic.
Port type
There are two types: P and PE. Provider edge (PE) is the marginal port of the service provider. Provider (P) is the core network port of the service provider. Set the external port to PE and internal port to P.
Encapsulation format
Multiple encapsulation formats are available: MartinioE, CCCoE, stack VLAN, and MartinioP. This attribute takes effective for a P port. MartinioE is applicable for point-to-multipoint Ethernet connection, MartinioP for point-to-point Ethernet connection and stack VLAN for EVPLAN service.
Enable LCAS
Enable LCAS or not
Maximum packet length
Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default.
Mapping protocol
LAPS and GFP-F are available. GFP-F is recommended.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
7.3.5 Version Description The EMR0 and EGR2 boards have N1 version and N2 version. N1 version is the basic version. N2 version is the enhanced version, having some new functions compared with N1 version. The functions and parameters listed in this section are applicable to the boards of N2 version. Table 7-19 gives the version description of the two versions. Table 7-19 Version description of the EMR0 and the EGR2
Item
Description
Similarity
The two versions are similar in the working principle and basic function. N2 version provides some new functions besides all functions of N1 version.
Difference
N1 version
N2 version
–
Support the aggregation of up to 12 FE ports.
–
Support the replacement of the VLAN tag in Ethernet data.
Support EVPLAN services, using stack VLAN encapsulation format.
Support EVPLAN services, using MPLS Martini encapsulation format.
Support the MAC address with 16,000 entries.
Support the MAC address with 64,000 entries.
Support the creating, deleting and query of VB. There can be 32 VBs and 16 logic ports for each VB at most.
Support the creating, deleting and query of VB. There can be 16 VBs and 32 logic ports for each VB at most.
–
Support configuring service routes on RPR manually.
–
Support the Echo function in RPR OAM which tests the link status.
NM support
The T2000 distinguish the boards of N1 version and that of N2 version directly.
Product support
The V100R001 product only supports the RPR board of N1 version. The V100R002 product supports the RPR board of N1 or N2 version. The V100R003 product supports the Ethernet board of N1 or N2 version.
Replacement
Boards of N1 version can only be used as boards of N1 version. To the V100R002 or V100R003 product, boards of N2 version can replace the ones of N1 version.
The EMR0 and the EGR2 are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-32
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
7.3.6 Technical Parameters Table 7-20 shows the technical parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2. For the parameters of GE and FE optical interface, refer to Table 7-14. Table 7-20 Technical Parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2
Board
Parameter Bit rate
EMR0
EGR2
10/100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s
4 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 1000 Mbit/s; Access capacity
12 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 1000 Mbit/s when used with ETF8 or EFF8
2 x 1000 Mbit/s
Processing capacity
12 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 1000 Mbit/s
2 x 1000 Mbit/s
Line code pattern
Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s), NRZ
NRZ
Connector
RJ-45, LC (SFP)
LC (SFP)
Interface impedance
100 ohm
–
Interface specifications
FE interface comply with IEEE802.3u and GE interface comply with IEEE802.3z
IEEE802.3z compliant
Dimensions (mm)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
Weight (kg)
1.20
1.10
Power consumption (W)
50
54
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Humidity: 10%–90%
Humidity: 10%–90%
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Humidity: 5%–95%
Humidity: 5%–95%
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10%–100%
Humidity: 10%–100%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-33
Humidity: 10%–100% Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10%–100%
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
7.4 ADL4/ADQ1 The ADL4 is a 1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board. The ADQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 ATM service processing board. The ADL4 and ADQ1 are responsible for accessing and processing ATM service. Table 7-21 shows the slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1 in OptiX OSN products. Table 7-21 Slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1
Product
ADL4
ADQ1
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–17
Slots 1–8, 11–17
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 6–8, 11–13
Slots 6–8, 11–13
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 7–8, 11–13
Slots 7–8, 11–13
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 12–13
Slots 12–13
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 11–13
Slots 11–13
7.4.1 Functionality ADL4
ADQ1
Basic function
Access and process 1 STM-4 ATM signal.
Access and process 4 STM-1 ATM signal.
Optical Interface specifications
Support S-4.1, L-4.1.
Support I-1, S-1.1, and L-1.1.
Connector
Hot-swappable LC (SFP)
Hot-swappable LC (SFP)
E3 ATM interface
12 × E3, inserted through PD3/PL3
12 × E3, inserted through PD3/PL3
Maximum uplink bandwidth
8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4
8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4
ATM switching capacity
1.2 Gbit/s
1.2 Gbit/s
Mapping mode
VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv (X=1–4)
VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv (X=1–4)
Service type
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or UBR
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or UBR
ATM connection
8000
8000
Statistics multiplexing
Supported
Supported
Traffic type and QoS
IETF RFC2514
IETF RFC2514
ATM multicast connection
Spacial multicast, logic multicast
Spacial multicast, logic multicast
Function
Board
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards ADL4
ADQ1
ATM protection (ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional/bidirectional 1+1 and 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring
Unidirectional/bidirectional 1+1 and 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring
Board protection
Support 1+1 backup
Support 1+1 backup
OAM function (ITU-T I.610)
AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (continuity check)
AIS, RDI, LB, CC
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level and ATM layer level for maintenance and fault localization.
Alarm and performance
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for maintenance and fault location.
Function
Board
7.4.2 Principle Figure 7-10 shows the functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1 (one STM-1/STM-4 signal is taken as an example). Backplane
STM-1/STM-4
STM-1/STM-4
Physical layer processing module
ATM service processing module
Mapping module
Control and communication module
Cross-connect unit Cross-connect unit
SCC
+3.3 V(Standby) +5 V
Power module
+3.3 V
-48 V
Figure 7-10 Functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1
1. In Receive Direction
The STM-1/STM-4 signal accessed from the optical interface is sent to the physical layer processing module after O/E conversion. After recovering data and clock, the physical layer processing module performs SDH functions such as framing, descrambling, overhead processing and pointer processing. In addition, it performs the functions of ATM cell delimitation, descrambling and filtering. The ATM service processing module establishes or disconnects connection for ATM service, and sends ATM service to the mapping module after parameter configuration. The mapping Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-35
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
module maps ATM service to VC3, VC4 and VC4-Xv, and finally sends the service to the cross-connect unit. 2. In Transmit Direction
The VC-3 (E3), VC-4 or VC4-Xv signal from the cross-connect unit is sent to the mapping module for demapping, and then to the ATM service processing module for establishing or disconnecting connection as well as configuring parameters. The uplink service is sent to the mapping module after being processed by the ATM service processing module, and then sent to the cross-connect unit. The downlink service is directly sent to the physical layer processing module for service rate matching, insertion of idle cell, and cell descrambling, and then for SDH mapping, overhead insertion, multiplexing and scrambling. Finally, the signal is sent out after E/O conversion. 3. Auxiliary Units
Control and communication module
Implement communication, control and service configuration functions.
Power module
Provide DC power supply of various voltages for the board.
7.4.3 Front Panel Figure 7-11 shows the front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1.l
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-36
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
ADL4 STAT ACT PROG SRV
7 Data Processing Boards
ADQ1 STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
ADL4
ADL4
ADQ1
ADQ1
Figure 7-11 Front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the ADL4 and ADQ1.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. 2. Interfaces
Number of optical interfaces: The ADL4 has one pair and the ADQ1 has four pairs of optical interfaces. Optical interface type: LC Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The ADL4 and ADQ1 use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-37
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
7.4.4 Protection Configuration The ADL4 and ADQ1 support 1+1 board level protection. The 1+1 board level protection for the ADL4 and the ADQ1 requires the working and protection ADL4/ADQ1 boards. The working and protection boards do not require seating in paired slots.
7.4.5 Parameter Configuration The parameters required by the ADL4 and ADQ1 are as follows:
J1
It is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. The J1 byte is set to “HuaWei SBS” by default.
C2
It is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4.
ATM interface setting
Table 7-22 lists the major parameters to be set for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1. Table 7-22 Parameters for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1
Parameter
Description
Port type
NNI and UNI. UNI is the default value.
Traffic type
Set according to the port.
Service type
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR
Peak cell rate (PCR)
Set the parameter for all types of services.
Sustainable cell rate (SCR)
Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR.
Maximum cell burst size
Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR.
Cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT)
Set the parameter when the service type is CBR, rt-VBR or UBR.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-38
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
7.4.6 Version Description The ADL4 and ADQ1 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).
7.4.7 Technical Parameters Table 7-23 shows the technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1. Table 7-23 Technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1
Parameter
Description ADL4
ADQ1
Bit rate
622080 kbit/s
155520 kbit/s
Access capacity
1 x STM-4
4 x STM-1
ATM processing capacity
1.2 Gbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Connector
LC (SFP)
Dimensions (nm)
H D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
W
Weight (kg)
0.9
0.95
Power consumption (W)
35
37
Optical module type
S-4.1
L-4.1
I-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1310
1310
1310
Transmission distance
2–15
15–40
2–15
2–15
15–40
Launched power (dBm)
–15 to –8
–3 to 2
–15 to –8
–15 to –8
–5 to 0
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–28
–28
–23
–28
–34
Receiver overload (dBm)
–8
–8
–8
–8
–10
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10%–90%
Humidity: 5%–95%
Humidity: 10%–100%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-39
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
Parameter
Description ADL4
Environment for transportation
ADQ1
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10%–100%
7.5 IDL4/IDQ1 The IDL4 is a 1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board with IMA. The IDQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 ATM service processing board with IMA. The IDL4 and IDQ1 can access and process 63×E1 inverse multiplexing ATM (IMA) services if used with the E1 service processing board. Table 7-24 shows the slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1. Table 7-24 Slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1
Product
IDL4
IDQ1
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–17
Slots 1–8, 11–17
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–16
Slots 1–8, 11–16
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 5–8, 11–13
Slots 5–8, 11–13
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 12–13
Slots 12–13
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 11–13
Slots 11–13
7.5.1 Functionality IDL4
IDQ1
Basic function
Access and process 1 STM-4 ATM signal.
Access and process 4 STM-1 ATM signal.
Optical interface specifications
Support S-4.1, L-4.1.
Support I-1, S-1.1, and L-1.1.
Connector
Hot-swappable LC (SFP)
Hot-swappable LC (SFP)
E3 ATM interface
12 x E3, inserted through PD3/PL3
12 x E3, inserted through PD3/PL3
Maximum uplink bandwidth
8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4
8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4
ATM switching capacity
1.2 Gbit/s
1.2 Gbit/s
Mapping mode
VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv (X=1–4)
VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv (X=1–4)
Function
Board
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-40
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Function
7 Data Processing Boards Board
IMA feature
IDL4
IDQ1
Access and process IMA service when used with the E1 service processing board. Process 63 x E1 IMA services. Support up to 32 IMA groups, 1–32 E1 for each group. The maximum multipath delay is 226ms.
Service type
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or UBR
ATM connection
8000
Statistics multiplexing
Supported
Traffic type and QoS
IETF RFC2514
ATM multicast connection
Spacial multicast, logic multicast
ATM protection (ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional/bidirectional 1+1 and 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring
Board protection
Support 1+1 backup
OAM function (ITU-T I.610)
AIS, RDI,loopback (LB),continuity check (CC)
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level and ATM layer level for maintenance and fault localization
Alarm and performance event
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for maintenance and fault location.
7.5.2 Principle The working principle of the IDL4 and IDQ1 is similar to that of the ADL4 and ADQ1, except that IMA processing is added to the ATM processing module. For the workings of the IDL4 and IDQ1, refer to Figure 7-10.
7.5.3 Front Panel Figure 7-11 shows the front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1.l
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-41
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
IDL4 STAT ACT PROG SRV
7 Data Processing Boards
IDQ1 STAT ACT PROG SRV
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
IDL4
IDL4
IDQ1
IDQ1
Figure 7-12 Front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the IDL4 and IDQ1.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. 2. Interfaces
Number of optical interfaces: The IDL4 has one pair and the IDQ1 has four pairs of optical interfaces. Optical interface type: LC Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The IDL4 and IDQ1 use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-42
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
7.5.4 Protection Configuration The IDL4 and IDQ1 support 1+1 board level protection. The working and protection IDL4/IDQ1 boards should seat in paired slots. Table 7-25 lists the paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1. Table 7-25 Paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1
Product
Paired slots
OptiX OSN 3500 (80Gbit/s)
(8&11), (7&12), (6&13), (5&14), (4&15), (3&16), (2&17)
OptiX OSN 3500 (40Gbit/s)
(8&11), (7&12), (6&13), (5&14), (4&15), (3&16)
OptiX OSN 2500
(8&11), (7&12)
OptiX OSN 1500A
(13&12)
OptiX OSN 1500B
(13&12)
7.5.5 Parameter Configuration The parameters required by the IDL4 and IDQ1 are as follows:
J1
It is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. The J1 byte is set to “HuaWei SBS” by default.
C2
It is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4.
ATM interface setting
Table 7-26 lists the major parameters to be set for the ATM interface on the IDL4/IDQ1. Table 7-26 Parameters for the ATM interface on the IDL4/IDQ1
Parameter
Description
Port type
NNI and UNI. UNI is the default value.
Traffic type
Set according to the port.
Service type
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR
Peak cell rate (PCR)
Set the parameter for all types of services.
Sustainable cell rate (SCR)
Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR.
Maximum cell burst size
Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-43
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
Parameter
Description
Cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT)
Set the parameter when the service type is CBR, rt-VBR or UBR.
7.5.6 Version Description The IDL4 and IDQ1 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).
7.5.7 Technical Parameters Table 7-27 shows the technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1. Table 7-27 Technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1
Parameter
Description IDL4
IDQ1
Bit rate
622080 kbit/s
155520 kbit/s
Access capacity
1 x STM-4
4 x STM-1
ATM processing capacity
1.2 Gbit/s
IMA processing capacity
Process 63 E1s (provide 63 PHY addresses), and support 32 IMA groups. Number of E1s within an IMA group is configurable, which can be 1–32. Support configurable IMA frame length. Support IMA1.1 protocol. The maximum multipath delay is 226ms.
Line code pattern
NRZ
Connector
LC (SFP)
Dimensions (nm)
H D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
W
Weight (kg)
1.01
1.01
Power consumption (W)
36.6
36.6
Optical module type
S-4.1
L-4.1
I-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1310
1310
1310
Transmission distance
2–15
15–40
2–15
2–15
15–40
Launched power (dBm)
–15 to –8
–3 to 2
–15 to –8
–15 to –8
–5 to 0
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–28
–28
–23
–28
–34
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-44
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
Parameter
Description IDL4
IDQ1
Receiver overload (dBm)
–8
–8
–8
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
–8
–10
Humidity: 10%–90%
Humidity: 5%–95%
Humidity: 10%–100%
Humidity: 10%–100%
7.6 MST4 The MST4 is a 4 x multi-service transparent transmission processing board, responsible for accessing and transmitting transparently fiber channel (FC), fiber connection (FICON), enterprise systems connection (ESCON), and digital video broadcast - asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) services. Table 7-28 shows the slots for the MST4. Table 7-28 Slots for the MST4
Product
MST4
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–16
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–16
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 5–8, 11–13
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 12–13
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 11–13
7.6.1 Functionality Function
Board
Basic function
MST4 Provide four independent multi-service access interfaces and support transparent transmission of 4 storage area network (SAN)/video signals.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-45
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
Function
7 Data Processing Boards Board
MST4 Support FC50, FC100/FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI signal. The service types and rates are shown in Table 7-29. Support four-port FC service (FC50, FC100/FICON and FC200), with the total bandwidth not exceeding 2.5 Gbit/s.
Service type
Support transmission of FC service at full rate, that is, transmission of one FC200 or two FC100, or four FC50 services. Support four-port ESCON or DVB-ASI service. Connector
Hot-swappable LC (SFP)
Distance extension function
The first and second interfaces support SDH side distance extension function: FC100 supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km. The first and second interfaces support client side distance extension function: FC100 supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20 km.
Maximum uplink bandwidth
The backplane supports the connection of four 622 Mbit/s buses to the cross-connect unit. The total uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
Encapsulation format
Support GFP-T encapsulation format in compliance with ITU-T G.7041.
Mapping mode
VC-4-Xc(X=1, 4, 8, 16)
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level for maintenance and fault localization
Alarm and performance event
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for maintenance and fault location.
Table 7-29 The service types and rates provided by the MST4
Service type
Bit rate
Remarks
FC50
531.25 Mbit/s
Storage area network (SAN)
FC100/FICON
1062.5 Mbit/s
SAN service
FC200
2125 Mbit/s
SAN service
ESCON
200 Mbit/s
SAN service
DVB-ASI
270 Mbit/s
Video service
7.6.2 Principle Figure 7-13 shows the working principle of the MST4.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-46
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards Backplane
FC ESCON
ATM service processing module
Interface module
DVB-ASI
FE protocol processin g module
Mapping module
Control and communication module
Cross-connect unit
SCC
+3.3 V (Standby) +5 V +2.5 V +3.3 V
Power module
-48 V
Figure 7-13 The functional block diagram of the MST4
1. In Receive Direction
The interface processing module accesses the optical signal from external equipment (such as Ethernet switch, router, SAN equipment, or multi-media equipment), decodes the signal after O/E conversion and sends the signal to the encapsulation module for GFP-T encapsulation. The encapsulated signal is sent to the mapping module for mapping to VC-4-Xc or VC-4. And finally sent to the SDH cross-connect unit. If port 1 and port 2 need to implement distance extension function for FC100 and FC200 services, the first and second signal from the interface processing module is sent to the FC protocol processing module, then sent to the encapsulation module and mapping module, and finally sent to the cross-connect unit or DWDM equipment. 2. In Transmit Direction
The VC-4-Xc signal from the cross-connect unit or DWDM equipment is demapped and then sent to the encapsulation module for de-encapsulation. The FC service needing distance extension is sent to the FC protocol processing module. Other services are sent to the interface processing module and then sent out after E/O conversion. 3. Auxiliary Units
Control and communication module
It achieves control, communication and service configuration for the board.
Power module
Provide various voltages required by the boards.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-47
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
7.6.3 Front Panel Figure 7-14 shows the front panel of the MST4. MST4 STAT ACT PROG SRV
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
MST4
Figure 7-14 The front panel of the MST4
1. Indicator
There are four indicators on the MST4.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. 2. Interface
Number of optical interfaces: The MSTE has four pairs of optical interfaces. Optical interface type: LC Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-48
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
7 Data Processing Boards
Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The MST4 uses swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.
7.6.4 Parameter Configuration Parameters to be configured for the MST4:
J1
J1 is the path trace byte. The transmit end sends the byte (higher order access point identifier) successively to inform the receive end that the connection between the two ends is normal. Once the receive end detects J1 mismatch, the involved VC-4 path will generate the HP TIM alarm. J1 byte is set as “Huawei SBS” by default.
C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. The C2 bytes transmitted should match with those received, once mismatch is detected, the involved VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4.
7.6.5 Version Description The MST4 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).
7.6.6 Technical Parameters Table 7-30 shows the technical parameters of the MST4. Table 7-30 Technical parameters of the MST4
Parameter
Description
Line code pattern
NRZ
Optical interface type
LC (SFP)
Dimensions (mm)
262.05 x 220 x 25.4
Weight (kg)
0.9
Power consumption (W)
40
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10%–90%
Humidity: 5%–95%
Humidity: 10%–100% Environment for
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10%–100%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-49
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Cross-Connect and System Control Boards This chapter introduces cross-connect and system control boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The technical details cover:
Functionality
Principle
Front panel
Protection configuration
Parameter configuration
Version description
Technical parameters
Refer to Table 4-4 for the name and descriptions of the cross-connect and system control boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE The GXCS/EXCS/UXCS is the cross-connect and synchronous timing board of the OptiX OSN 3500. The XCE is a lower-order cross-connect and synchronous timing board used for extended subracks. The GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE, seated in slot 9 or 10 on the subrack, implement the functions of cross-connection and system timing. The GXCS is an ordinary cross-connect and synchronous timing board, but the EXCS is an enhanced one, and the UXCS is a super one. The UXCS can also be classified into UXCSA and UXCSB. Table 8-1 shows their differences. Table 8-1 Comparison among GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE.
Cross-connect and timing board
Higher order cross-connect capability
Lower order cross-conne ct capacity
Usage
GXCSA
40 Gbit/s
5 Gbit/s
Used for the main subrack, not supporting the extended subrack.
EXCSA
80 Gbit/s
5 Gbit/s
Used for the main subrack, not supporting the extended subrack.
UXCSA
80 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s
Used for the main subrack, not supporting the extended subrack.
UXCSB
80 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s
Used for the main subrack, not supporting the 1.25 Gbit/s extended subrack.
XCE
0 Gbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s
Used for the extended subrack.(Note)
Note: The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack is adopted.
8.1.1 Functionality
Support VC-4 unblocked higher order full cross-connect and VC-3 or VC-12 unblocked lower order full cross-connect. For the cross-connect capacity of different boards, see Table 8-1.
Provide flexible service grooming capability, and support loopback, cross-connect, multicast and broadcast services.
Support SNCP protection at VC-3 or VC-12.
The XCE provides 1.25 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect capability and is capable of adding/dropping up to 504 E1s/T1s.
Support such concatenation services as AU4-4C, AU4-8C, AU4-16C, and AU4-64C.
Support 1+1 hot backup, with the protection mode being revertive switching and non-revertive switching.
Support smooth upgrade from GXCS to EXCS or UXCS, with signal failure time less than 50ms.
Support smooth upgrade from EXCS to UXCS, with signal failure time less than 50ms.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Process S1 byte to realize clock protection switching.
Input and output two channels of synchronization clock, with clock signal set to 2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s.
Communicate with other boards.
8.1.2 Principle Here takes the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS board as an example to introduce their working principle, as shown in Figure 8-1. The working principle of the XCE board is little different from that of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS board, only supporting lower order cross-connect. Lower order crossconnect matrix 5 Gbit/s or 20 Gbit/s Higher order crossconnect matrix VC-4
-48 V
Timing unit
40 Gbit/s or 80 Gbit/s
Power module
+3.3 V +5 V +2.7 V
Board and system Clock source
Communication and control unit
Figure 8-1 Functional block diagram of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS
1. Higher Order Cross-Connect Matrix
The GXCS performs 40 Gbit/s space division higher order cross-connect, and the EXCS or UXCS performs 80 Gbit/s space division higher order cross-connect. 2. Lower Order Cross-Connect Matrix
GXCS or EXCS implement 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect and realize unblocked full cross-connect. UXCS implement 20 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect and realize unblocked full cross-connect. They are providing the system with powerful service grooming capability. 3. Timing Unit
Trace the external clock source or internal clock source, providing itself and the system with the synchronization clock source. At the same time, it provides various nodes in the data flow of the system with clock signals appropriate to the frequency and phase, so that the devices at each node can meet the requirements for data setup time and hold time, and provide the system with framing signals for identifying the position of the frame head in the data. 4. Control and Communication Unit
Communicate with the SCC and other boards, and ensure communication with other boards when the SCC is not in position. It also generates various other control signals Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
for the GXCS/EXCS and system. 5. Power Module
Provides power supply of various voltages for the board.
8.1.3 Front Panel Figure 8-2 shows the front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS, and XCE.
GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCSA
UXCSB
XCE
Figure 8-2 Front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
1. Indicators
There are indicators on the front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE to indicate their working status. The description of the indicators is shown in Table 8-2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Table 8-2 Indicators of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
Indicator
Color and status
Description
STAT (red or green)
On, green
The board works normally.
On, red
The board hardware fails.
Off
The board is not powered on, or no service is configured.
On
The service is activated.
Off
The service is not activated.
On, green
The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully.
On for 100ms and off for 100ms alternatively, green
The board software or software for FPGA is being uploaded.
On for 300ms and off for 300ms alternatively, green
The board software is being initialized, and is in BIOS boot stage.
On, red
The board software or software for FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in initializing.
Off
No power supply.
On, green
Service is normal, and no service alarm occurs.
On, red
A critical or major alarm occurs to service.
On, yellow
A minor or remote alarm occurs to service.
Off
No service is configured.
On, green
The clock works in synchronous status.
On, red
The clock works in hold-over or free-run mode.
ACT (green)
PROG (red or green)
SRV (red, yellow or green)
SYNC (red or green)
2. Interfaces
There are interfaces on the front panel of UXCSB/XCE for connecting extended subrack cables. “EXA” and “EXB” backup each other. Through these two interfaces, the main subrack and the extended subrack can be connected, as shown in Figure 8-3.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
AUX
S 1 0
S S S S S S S S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PQ1/PQM (W) PQ1/PQM (W) PQ1/PQM (W) PQ1/PQM (W)
EXB EXA
XCE
S S S S S S S S S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FAN
XCE
FAN
EXB EXA
FAN
PQ1/PQM (P) PQ1/PQM (W) PQ1/PQM (W) PQ1/PQM (W) PQ1/PQM (W)
D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S
PIU
PIU
D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S D75S/D12S
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
(1)(2)(3) (4)
Figure 8-3 Configuration of extended subracks (1) The “EXB” interface of the XCE (in slot 9) is connected to the “EXB” of the UXCSB (in slot 9) on the main subrack. (2) The “EXA” interface of the XCE (in slot 9) is connected to the “EXA” of the UXCSB (in slot 9) on the main subrack. (3) The “EXB” interface of the XCE (in slot 10) is connected to the “EXB” of the UXCSB (in slot 10) on the main subrack. (4) The “EXA” interface of the XCE (in slot 10) is connected to the “EXA” of the UXCSB (in slot 10) on the main subrack.
The input/output interface for external clock of the cross-connect and synchronous timing board is on the AUX board. Here only the interface names are given, as shown in Table 8-3. For a detailed description of relevant interfaces, refer to the interface description of the AUX board. Table 8-3 External clock interface of the GXCS, EXCS and UXCS
Interface name
Description
Interface type
CLKO1
75-ohm clock output interface 1
SMB
CLKO2
75-ohm clock output interface 2
SMB
CLKI1
75-ohm clock input interface 1
SMB
CLKI2
75-ohm clock input interface 2
SMB
CLK1
120- ohm clock interface 1
RJ-45
CLK2
120-ohm clock interface 2
RJ-45
8.1.4 Protection Configuration The GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE supports 1+1 protection.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
8.1.5 Parameter Configuration The parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE to be set through NM are as follows. 1. When There is No External Clock and Synchronization Status Message (SSM) is not Started
Primary reference clock
Trace level of clock source
2. When External Clock is Configured and SSM is Started
Primary reference clock
Trace level of clock source
Type of external building integrated timing supply (BITS)
S1 byte
Threshold for clock switching protection
8.1.6 Version Description The GXCSA of the OptiX OSN 3500 has two versions: N1 and N2, as described in Table 8-4. Table 8-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards
Item
Description
Similarity
Board functions and board software are the same.
Difference
Different FPGA program is uploaded due to different hardware.
NM support
The T2000 does not distinguish N1 from N2.
Product support
Each product version (including V100R001, V100R002 and V100R003) supports N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA. The N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA can be replaced by each other.
Version replacement
Because the N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA use different FPGA program, select corresponding FPGA program in upgrading. Otherwise, the upgrading will fail.
The EXCSA, UXCSA, UXCSB and XCE have only one version: N1. They are only applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and extended subrack. Technical Parameters Table 8-5 shows the technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE. Table 8-5 Technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
Parameter
Description GXCSA EXCSA
UXCSA
UXCSB
XCE
Higher order cross-connect capability
40 Gbit/s
80 Gbit/s
80 Gbit/s
80 Gbit/s
0 Gbit/s
Lower order cross-connect capacity
5 Gbit/s
5 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Parameter
Description GXCSA EXCSA
External clock
UXCSA
UXCSB
XCE
2 channels, 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz
Dimensions (mm)
H D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 40 (W)
W
Weight (kg)
1.81
2.00
2.00
2.00
1.50
Power consumption (W)
27
62
65
65
25
Long-term working condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term working condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10%–90%
Humidity: 5%–95%
Humidity: 10%–100% Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10%–100%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are boards integrating the functions of the SDH processing unit, system control & communication unit, cross-connect unit and timing unit. They are only applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500. The CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 is seated in slots 9–10 in the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack. The CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 is seated in slots 4–5 in the OptiX OSN 1500 subrack. Table 8-6 shows a comparison among them. Table 8-6 Comparison among CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
Board name
CXL1
CXL4
CXL16
Line processing capacity
1 x STM-1
1 x STM-4
1 x STM-16
Cross-connect capacity (higher order)
20 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s
Cross-connect capacity (lower order) (Note)
5 Gbit/s/20 Gbit/s
5 Gbit/s/20 Gbit/s
5 Gbit/s/20 Gbit/s
Clock function
Same
System control function
Same
Note: The CXL series boards have two versions: Q1 and Q2. The lower order cross-connect capacity of Q1 version is 5 Gbit/s and that of Q2 version is 20 Gbit/s.
8.2.1 Functionality 1. SDH Processing Unit
The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 boards are responsible for receiving and transmitting one optical signal at STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 level respectively. Their optical interfaces are compliant with ITU-T Recommendation G.957, frame structures compliant with ITU-T Recommendation G.707, and the jitter specifications compliant with ITU-T G.825 and ITU-T G.958.
The CXL1 supports S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2 optical modules for different transmission distances.
The CXL4 supports S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 optical modules for different transmission distances.
The CXL16 supports I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1 and L-16.2 optical modules for different transmission distances.
The CXL16 supports VC-4-4C, VC-4-8C and VC-4-16C concatenated services.
Support various protection schemes such as two-fiber and four-fiber bidirectional MS ring protection, linear MSP and SNCP.
Provide abundant alarm and performance events for convenient equipment management and maintenance.
Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces for fast fault location.
Support ALS function, avoiding laser injury to human body during maintenance.
Support on-line query of the board information and the optical power.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Support smooth software upgrade and capacity expansion.
2. System Control & Communication Unit
Configure and groom service, monitor service performance, and collect performance events and alarm information.
Provide 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for NM connection.
Provide F&f interface through the SEI board for COA management.
Provide one 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between various boards.
Provide one 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between the active and standby CXL.
Provide the OAM interface through SEI, supporting remote maintenance of the Modem of RS232 DCE.
Process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management.
Support management of fan, such as fan alarm and speed control.
Provide PIU with lightening protection and in-position detection function.
3. Cross-Connect Unit
Implement 20 Gbit/s VC-4 full cross-connection and 5 Gbit/s20/Gbit/s VC-12/VC-3 full cross-connection respectively.
Provide two 4 Mbit/s HDLC emergency paths for MSP and SNCP.
Support flexible service grooming, including loopback, cross-connection, multicast, and broadcasting.
Provisioning/removing service does not affect other services.
Support SNCP at VC-3 and VC-12 levels.
Support AU4-4C, AU4-8C and AU4-16C concatenated services.
Support 1+1 hot backup protection, both revertive and non-revertive mode. The default is non-revertive.
4. Timing Unit
Provide standard system synchronization clock.
Input two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals, and is capable of selecting the external timing source.
Output two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals.
Provide SSM, extract, insert and process clock ID.
8.2.2 Principle The CXL16 is taken as an example in the following description. Figure 8-4 shows the functional block diagram of the CXL16. The CXL16 integrates the STM-16 SDH processing unit, cross-connect unit, system control & communication unit and timing unit.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Front panel
Backplane STM-16 SDH processing unit
Cross connect unit
System control and communication unit
Timing unit
Figure 8-4 Functional block diagram of the CXL16
8.2.3 Front Panel The front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 is shown in Figure 8-5. CXL1
CXL16
CXL4
STAT ACTX ACTC PROG SRVX SRVL SYNC ALMC
STAT ACTX ACTC PROG SRVX SRVL SYNC ALMC
STAT ACTX ACTC PROG SRVX SRVL SYNC ALMC
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
IN RESET
RESET
RESET
ALM CUT
ALM CUT
ALM CUT
CXL1
CXL4
CXL16
CXL1
CXL4
CXL16
Figure 8-5 Front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
1. Indicators
The indicator description of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 is shown in Table 8-7. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Table 8-7 Indicators of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
Indicator
Color and status
Description
STAT
On, green
The board works normally.
On, red
The board hardware fails.
Off
The board is not powered on, or service is not configured.
On, green
The cross-connect unit is in active status.
Off
The cross-connect unit is in standby status.
On, green
The system control & communication unit is in active status.
Off
The system control & communication unit is in standby status.
On, green
The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully.
On for 100ms and off for 100ms alternatively, green
The board software or software for FPGA is being uploaded.
On for 300ms and off for 300ms alternatively, green
The board software is being initialized, and is in BIOS boot stage.
On, red
The board software or software for FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in initializing.
Off
No power supply.
On, green
Service operates normally on the cross-connect unit.
On, red
Switching (for example, TPS) occurs to the service on the cross-connect unit.
On, green
Service operates normally on the line unit, and no service alarm occurs.
On, red
A critical or major alarm occurs to the line service.
On, yellow
A minor or remote alarm occurs to the line service.
Off
The line service is not configured or no power supply.
On, yellow
Alarm is cut off permanently.
Off
Alarm is normally provided.
ACTX
ACTC
PROG
SRVX
SRVL
ALMC
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Indicator
Color and status
Description
SYNC (red or green)
On, green
The clock works in synchronous status.
On, red
The clock works in a hold-over or free-run mode.
2. Interfaces
The interfaces on the front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 boards are shown in Table 8-8. Table 8-8 Interfaces of CXL
Name
Description
Function
Line optical interface
LC
Receive and transmit optical signal. Use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.
RESET
Reset button
Press the button to warm reset the SCC unit.
ALM CUT
Alarm cut switch
Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once. Press and hold the ALM CUT for three seconds to cut off audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT again to enable audible alarms.
8.2.4 Protection Configuration The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 support 1+1 protection.
8.2.5 Parameter Configuration The parameters required by the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are as follows. 1. J1
J1 is the path trace byte. It is used to transmit repetitively a higher order access point identifier so that the receive end can verify its continued connection to the intended transmit end. When J1 mismatch is detected at receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate an HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default. 2. C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate an HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Table 8-9 associates C2 byte setting to service type.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Table 8-9 Correspondence between C2 byte setting and service type
service type
C2 byte setting
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
34 Mbit/s/45 Mbit/s asynchronously mapped into C-3
E4
140 Mbit/s asynchronously mapped into C-4
Null
Unloaded
3. When There is No External Clock and Synchronization Status Message (SSM) is not Started
Primary reference clock
Trace level of clock source
4. When External Clock is Configured and SSM is Started
Primary reference clock
Trace level of clock source
Type of external building integrated timing supply (BITS)
S1 byte
Threshold for clock switching protection
8.2.6 Version Description The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 have two versions: Q1 and Q2. Except that cross-connect capacity and software features, the two versions support the same functions. Q1CXL1/Q1CXL4/Q1CXL16: Higher order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s and lower order cross-connect capacity is 5 Gbit/s. On the T2000, the Q1CXL board is displayed as three logic boards: CXL, SCC and Q1SL1/4/16. Q2CXL1/Q2CXL4/Q2CXL16: Higher order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s and lower order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s. Support intelligent features. On the T2000, the Q2CXL is displayed as three logic boards: ECXL, GSCC and Q1SL1/4/16.
8.2.7 Technical Parameters The technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are shown in Table 8-10. Table 8-10 Technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
Parameter
Description CXL1
CXL4
CXL16
Bit rate
155520 kbit/s
622080 kbit/s
2488320 kbit/s
Connector
LC
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
H D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 1.12
1.12
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-14
W
1.12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Parameter Power consumption (W)
Description CXL1
CXL4
CXL16
40
40
40
CXL1 Optical module type
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Le-1.2
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1550
1550
Transmission distance (km)
2–15
15–40
40–80
80–100
Launched power (dBm)
–15 to –8
–5 to 0
–5 to 0
–3 to 2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–28
–34
–34
–34
Receiver overload (dBm)
–8
–10
–10
–10
Optical module type
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Le-4.2
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1550
1550
Transmission distance (km)
2–15
15–40
40–80
80–100
Launched power (dBm)
–15 to –8
–3 to 2
–3 to 2
–3 to 2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–28
–28
–28
–33
Receiver overload (dBm)
–8
–8
–8
–8
CXL4
CXL16 Optical module type
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1310
1550
Transmission distance (km)
0–2
2–15
15–40
40–80
Launched power (dBm)
–10 to 3
–5 to 0
–2 to 3
–2 to 3
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
–18
–18
–27
–28
Receiver overload (dBm)
–3
0
–9
–9
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Parameter
Description CXL1
CXL4
Long-term working condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term working condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
CXL16
Humidity: 10%–90%
Humidity: 5%–95%
Humidity: 10%–100%
Humidity: 10%–100%
8.3 SCC/GSCC The SCC is the system control and communication board, seated in slot 17 or 18. It functions main control, orderwire, communication and system power monitoring. The OptiX OSN 3500 also provides the GSCC that supports intelligent features and extended subrack.
8.3.1 Functionality
Support 1+1 hot backup protection. When the active board fails, the service will switch to the standby board automatically.
Monitor service performance, and collect performance events and alarm information.
Provide the F&f interface through the AUX board for management of case-shape optical amplifier (COA).
Provide one 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface (the port is on the AUX board) for communication with the NM.
Provide one 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between the active and standby SCCs.
Process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management information.
Process such bytes as E1, E2, F1 and Serial 1–4.
Provide one 64 k codirectional data interface F1 through AUX.
Provide the OAM interface through AUX, supporting remote maintenance of the Modem of RS232 data connected equipment (DCE).
Monitor –48 V power supply of the system.
Support control of four cabinet indicators.
Process 16 housekeeping alarm inputs and four housekeeping alarm outputs.
Support management of intelligent fan, such as fan alarm and speed control.
Provide PIU with lightening protection and in-position detection function.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
8.3.2 Principle
Caution: There are four important databases on the SCC: mdb, drdb, fdb0 and fdb1. The mdb is in the dynamic random-access memory (RAM), saving the current databases. The drdb is saved in flash RAM. When power failure occurs to NE, the databases will be recovered in the order of drdb→fdb0→fdb1. The drdb will be checked first for configuration data. If the configuration data are safe in drdb, they will be recovered to mdb from drdb; if they are damaged, data will be recovered from fdb0 or fdb1, depending on which saves the latest data. If data in fdb0 are also damaged, fdb1 is used for data recovery. Therefore, it is important to back up data to fdb0 and fdb1 and compare the data in them.
Figure 8-6 shows the functional block diagram of the SCC. F1 1 orderwire phone 2 SDH NNI phones Serial 1-4 40 DCCs (D1-D3)
Overhead processing module
Power monitoring module
Control module
Communication module
16 alarm inputs and 4 alarm outputs interface 5 cabinet alarm indicator interface AUX backup power alarm detection Fan alarm detection and management PIU alarm detection and management
NM interface F&f OAM
+3.3 V Power module
-48 V
+2.7 V +5 V
Figure 8-6 Functional block diagram of the SCC
1. Control Module
The control module configures and manages boards and NEs, collect alarms and performance events, and backs up important data. The control module processes 40 DCC (D1–D3) bytes. 2. Communication Module
The communication module provides 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for NM connection, F&f interface for managing external devices such as COA, and the OAM interface. The communication module also process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management. 3. Overhead Processing Module
The overhead processing module receives overhead signals from the line slot and Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
processes such bytes as E1, E2, F1 and serials 1–4. The overhead processing module also sends overhead signals to the line board, and externally provides one orderwire interface, two SDH NNI audio interfaces, interface F1, and the broadcast data interfaces serials 1–4. The position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame is shown in Figure 8-7. A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
J0
B1
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
Serial 1 Serial2
AU_PTR B2
B2
D4
Serial 4
B2
K1
K2
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
S1
M1
Serial3
E2
Figure 8-7 Position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame
4. Power Monitoring Module
The power monitoring module comprises –48 V power monitoring and working power.
The working power provides the SCC with working voltage and detects and switches the active and standby 3.3 V power supply (which is provided through AUX).
The –48 V power monitoring module monitors the +3.3 V power alarm of AUX, monitors fan alarms, monitors and manages the PIU, and processes sixteen housekeeping alarm inputs and four housekeeping alarm outputs as well as the cabinet alarm indicator signal.
8.3.3 Front Panel The SCC front panel is shown in Figure 8-8.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
SCC STAT ACT PROG SRV PWRA PWRB PWRC ALMC
RESET
ALM CUT
SCC
Figure 8-8 The front panel of the SCC and the GSCC
1. Switch
The switch description of the SCC is shown in Table 8-11 Table 8-11 Switch description of the SCC
Name
Function
RESET
Reset button
ALM CUT
Alarm cut switch Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once. Press and hold the ALM CUT for three seconds to cut off audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT again to enable audible alarms.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
2. Indicators
The indicator description of the SCC is shown in Table 8-12 Table 8-12 Indicator description of the SCC
Indicator
Status
Description
STAT (red or green)
On, green
The board works normally.
On, red
The board hardware fails.
Off
The board is not powered on, or no service is configured.
On
The service is activated.
Off
The service is not activated.
On, green
The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully.
On for 100ms and off for 100ms alternatively, green
The board software or software for FPGA is being uploaded.
On for 300ms and off for 300ms alternatively, green
The board software is being initialized, and is in BIOS boot stage.
On, red
The board software or software for FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in initializing.
Off
No power supply.
On, green
Service is normal, no service alarm occurs.
On, red
A critical or major alarm occurs to service.
On, yellow
A minor or remote alarm occurs to service.
Off
No service is configured.
On, green
The –48 V power supply A is normal.
On (red/off)
The –48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or failed).
On, green
The –48 V power supply B is normal.
On (red/off)
The –48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or failed).
ACT (green)
PROG (red or green)
SRV (red, yellow or green)
PWRA (red or green)
PWRB (red or green)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Indicator
Status
Description
PWRC (red or green)
On, green
The 3.3 V protection power is normal.
On, red
The 3.3 V protection power is lost.
On, green
Permanent alarm cut-off.
Off
Give audible warning upon alarm.
ALMC (yellow)
Note: Power supply A indicates the first power input. Power supply B indicates the second power input.
3. Interfaces
The interfaces provided by the SCC are led out through the AUX. For details, refer to the interface description of the AUX.
8.3.4 Version Description The SCC has one version N1. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500. It does not support intelligent features or extended subracks. The GSCC has two versions: N1 and N2. The N1GSCC is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and supports intelligent features or extended subracks. The N2GSCC is applicable to the OptiX OSN 7500 or OptiX OSN 3500 and supports intelligent features.
8.3.5 Technical Parameters Table 8-13 shows the technical parameters of the SCC. Table 8-13 Technical parameters of the SCC
Parameter
Description
Processing capability
System control, inter-board communication, orderwire, and power detection
Dimensions (mm)
H D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) Weight (kg)
0.88
Power consumption (W)
10
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C Humidity: 10%–90%
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C Humidity: 5%–95%
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10%–100%
Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10%–100%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-21
W
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
8.4 CRG The CRG is the system control and clock unit of the OptiX OSN 2500 REG, seated in slots 9–10. It implements control, orderwire, communication, and clock assignment and tracing functions.
8.4.1 Functionality 1. System Control and Communication Unit
Implement service configuration and grooming, monitor service performance, and collect performance events and alarm information.
Provide the F&f interface through the SEI board for management of case-shape optical amplifier (COA).
Provide a 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface through the SEI board for communication with the NM.
Provide the RS232 DCE remote maintenance interface (X.25) through SEI, supporting the access of Modem
Process 40 data communication channels (DCCs) to provide the transmit link for network management
Process such bytes as E1, Serial 1–4, F1, D1–D12, and ID.
Provide transparent transmission of D1–D12 bytes of other manufacturers.
Provide two 485 bus lines for communication between boards. The two lines backup each other.
Provide a 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for communication between boards, and report of board alarm information and performance information.
Provide a 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between active and standby SCC boards.
Monitor –48 V power supply of the system.
Support management of fan, such as fan alarm and speed control.
Support control of four cabinet indicators.
Support revertive or nonrevertive switching between active and standby boards without impact on services.
Support warm reset, cold reset and reset by pressing button. The warm reset does not affect services.
Support querying board information, which includes board software version, FPGA version, BIOS version, and board manufacturing information.
2. Clock Unit
Implement system timing function, which complies with the timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks under REG mode specified in ITU-T G.813.
When REG works normally, the clock at the transmit end is synchronized with that at the receive end. The clock works in pass-through mode. If the clock at the receive end is lost, the clock at the transmit end traces the free-run clock in the equipment. The accuracy is greater than 20 ppm.
Support trace and free-run working modes and switching between the two. The Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
current working mode can be queried.
Support processing S1 byte.
Support setting and querying the clock trace source priority table.
The reference clock source of the system clock is the line clock or clock within the system.
8.4.2 Principle Figure 8-9 shows the functional block diagram of the CRG.
System control module
FPGA
2K
Timing module
Line clock from line units
-48 V
Communication module
Power module
38M 5V 3.3 V 1.5 V
NM interface F&f OAM
Boards in other slots
Detecting module
Figure 8-9 Functional block diagram of the CRG
1. System Control Module
Configure and manage the board and NEs, collect alarms and performance events, and backup important data. 2. Communication Module
It provides:
10 Mbit/s/100Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interfaces for connection with NM and communication between boards.
F&f interface to manage external equipment such as COA as well as OAM interface to support maintenance and management.
communication processing function through ECC channel.
3. FPGA
It is a software processing module. 4. Clock Module
When the REG works normally, the clock module extracts and traces the line clock received by the source end, and provides system clock signals (2 kbit/s or 38 Mbit/s signals, for example) required by the system. 5. Detection Module
It detects board temperature, power supply (over-voltage and under-voltage), clock Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
frequency deviation and failure. 6. Power Module
The power monitoring module comprises –48 V power monitoring and working power. The working power provides the CRG board with working voltage and detects and switches the active and standby 3.3 V power supply (which is provided through AUX). The –48 V power monitoring monitors the +3.3 V power alarm of AUX, monitors and manages the fan, and processes housekeeping alarm inputs and outputs as well as the cabinet alarm indicator signal.
8.4.3 Front Panel Figure 8-10 shows the front panel of the CRG. CRG STAT ACTC PROG SYNC ALMC
RESET
ALM CUT
CRG
Figure 8-10 Front panel of the CRG
1. Switch
The switch description of the CRG is shown in Table 8-14. Table 8-14 Switch description of the CRG
Name
Function
RESET
Reset button
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
Name
Function
ALM CUT
Alarm cut switch Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once. Press and hold the ALM CUT for five seconds to cut off audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT again to enable audible alarms.
2. Indicators
The indicator description of the CRG is shown in Table 8-15. Table 8-15 Indicator description of the CRG
Indicator
Status
Description
STAT (red or green)
On, green
The board works normally.
On, red
The board hardware fails.
Off
The board is not powered on, or no service is configured.
On
The CRG is in the active status.
Off
The CRG is in the standby status.
On, green
The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully.
On for 100ms and off for 100ms alternatively, green
The board software or software for FPGA is being uploaded.
On for 300ms and off for 300ms alternatively, green
The board software is being initialized, and is in BIOS boot stage.
On, red
The board software or software for FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in initializing.
Off
No power supply.
On, green
The clock works in synchronous status
On, red
Clock source is lost and the clock is working in the hold-over or free-run mode.
On
Permanent alarm cut-off
Off
Audible warning upon alarm.
ACTC (green)
PROG (red or green)
SYNC (red or green)
ALMC (yellow)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
3. Interfaces
The interfaces provided by the CRG are led out through the SEI. For details, refer to the interface description of the SEI.
8.4.4 Version Description The CRG has one version Q1. It is only applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 REG.
8.4.5 Technical Parameters Table 8-16 shows the technical parameters of the CRG. Table 8-16 Technical parameters of the CRG
Parameter
Description
Processing capability
System control, inter-board communication, orderwire, and power detection
Dimensions (mm)
262.05 x 220 x 25.4
Weight (kg)
0.90
Power consumption (W)
12
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C Humidity: 10%–90%
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C Humidity: 5%–95%
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10%–100%
Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10%–100%
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
9 Other Boards
9
Other Boards
This chapter introduces the optical amplifier board, built-in WDM unit, power board, orderwire board and auxiliary interface board of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The technical details cover:
Functionality
Principle
Front panel
Version description
Technical parameters
9.1 LWX The LWX is an arbitrary rate wavelength conversion board, converting signal of arbitrary rate (10 Mbit/s–2.7 Gbit/s NRZ encoding) at the client side into standard wavelength optical signal in compliance with G.692. Table 9-1 shows the slots for the LWX in the OptiX OSN products. Table 9-1 Slots for the LWX
Product
LWX
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–17
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–16
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 5–8, 11–13
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 12–13
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 11–13
9.1.1 Functionality
Convert client-side signals into ITU-T G.692 (DWDM) compliant standard Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
9 Other Boards
wavelength signals and transmit the signals transparently.
Provide 3R function for client-side signals (at the rate of 10 Mbit/s–2.7 Gbit/s), perform clock recovery and monitor its rate.
Provide two types of LWX board: one is single-fed single receiving, and the other is dual-fed signal selection.
The dual-fed signal selection LWX supports intra-board protection, realizing optical channel protection with one board. The protection switching time is less than 50ms.
The single-fed single receiving LWX supports inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection. The protection switching time is less than 50ms.
Support sub-carrier modulation to realize ECC communication.
The central wavelength complies with ITU-T, and channel spacing is 100 GHz. Support automatic laser shutdown function (ALS). When no light is received, the corresponding optical transmitting module will be automatically shut down.
Support inloop and outloop function at optical interface level for fault location.
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient maintenance.
Note: Sub-carrier modulation: Couple a weak 2.4 Gbit/s signal (after spreading) into the service signal and then modulate the laser. Obtain 2.4 Gbit/s signal through the bandpass filter after O/E conversion at the receiving end and then get the original signal through demodulation.
9.1.2 Principle The functional block diagram of the LWX board is shown in Figure 9-1. Backplane ITU-T G.692 wavelength 10 Mbit/s 2.7 Gbit/s Optical Client side transponder WDM side module 10 Mbit/s -
Performance and alarm monitoring
SCC
Control and communication module
SCC
2.7 Gbit/s
+3.3 V (Standby) +5 V
Power module
+2.7 V +3.3 V
Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the LWX
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-2
-48 V
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
9 Other Boards
1. In Receive Direction
The optical transponder module processes 10Mbit/s～2.7Gbit/s optical signal received from the client side. At the DWDM side, the LWX outputs ITU-T G.692-compliant standard wavelength signal. The optical transponder module can separate one channel of signal to the performance monitoring circuit for counting B1 bit errors. The optical transponder module has jitter suppression function which guarantees good jitter suppression performance. 2. In Transmit Direction
The LWX receives ITU-T G.692-compliant standard wavelength signal from the DWDM side. The optical transponder module processes the optical signal and outputs the 10Mbit/s～2.7Gbit/s signal at the client side . 3. Auxiliary Units
Control and communication module
Implement communication, control and service configuration functions.
Power module
Provide power supply of various voltages for the board.
9.1.3 Front Panel Figure 9-2 shows the front panel of the LWX board.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
9 Other Boards
LWX STAT ACT PROG SRV CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
TX RX OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2
LWX
Figure 9-2 Front panel of the LWX
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the LWX.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) – green
Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. 2. Interfaces
The LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWX are described in Table 9-2. Table 9-2 Interfaces of the LWX
Interface
Type
Description
IN1/IN2
LC
Receive the signals from the optical add/drop multiplexing board MR2.
OUT1/OUT2
LC
Send signals to the optical add/drop multiplexing board MR2.
TX
LC
Send service signal to client-side equipment.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
9 Other Boards
Interface
Type
Description
RX
LC
Receive the service signal from client-side equipment.
Note: IN1/OUT1 is a pair of receive/transmit optical interfaces, and IN2/OUT2 is another pair.
9.1.4 Version Description The LWX has only one version N1. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.
9.1.5 Technical Parameters Table 9-3 and Table 9-4 show the optical interface parameters on client side and DWDM side of the LWX. Table 9-5 shows the technical parameters of the LWX. Table 9-3 Client-side optical interface parameters of the LWX
Item
Unit
Description
Bit rate
10 Mbit/s–2.7 Gbit/s
Source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
2
15
80
Transmission distance
km
Characteristics of transmitter at point S Operating wavelength range
nm
850
1260–1360
1500–158 0
Maximum mean launched power
dBm
–3
0
+3
Min. mean launched power
dBm
–10
–5
–2
Min. extinction ratio
dB
+8.2
+8.2
+8.2
Min. side mode suppression ratio
dB
NA
30
30
G.957 compliant
G.957 compliant
G.957 compliant
PIN
PIN
APD
Eye pattern Characteristics of receiver at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range
nm
1200–1600
1200–1600
1200–160 0
Receiver sensitivity
dBm
–18
–18
–28
Min. receiver overload
dBm
–3
0
–9
Maximum reflectance
dB
–27
–27
–27
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
9 Other Boards
Table 9-4 DWDM-side optical interface parameters of the LWX
Item
Unit
Description
Channel spacing
GHz
100
Characteristics of transmitter at point Sn Transmission distance
km
640
170
80
Maximum mean launched power
dBm
–2
–2
–2
Min. mean launched power
dBm
+3
+3
+3
Min. extinction ratio
dB
+10
+10
+10
Nominal central frequency
THz
192.10–196. 00
192.10–196.00
192.10–196.00
Central frequency offset
GHz
±12.5
±12.5
±12.5
Maximum –20 dB spectrum width
nm
0.2
0.4
0.4
Min. side mode suppression ratio
dB
35
35
35
Dispersion tolerance value
ps/nm
12800
2400
1600
G.957 compliant
G.957 compliant
G.957 compliant
Eye pattern Characteristics of receiver at point Rn Receiver type
APD
PIN
Operating wavelength range
nm
1200–1600
1200–1600
Receiver sensitivity
dBm
–31
–21
Min. receiver overload
dBm
–9
0
Maximum reflectance
dB
–27
–27
Table 9-5 Technical parameters of the LWX
Parameter
Description
Line code pattern
NRZ encoding
Connector
LC
Dimensions (mm)
H D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) Weight (kg)
1.10
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-6
W
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
9 Other Boards
Parameter
Description
Power consumption (W)
30
Long-term operating condition
Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
Short-term operating condition
Temperature: –5°C to 50°C
Environment for storage
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C
Humidity: 10%–90%
Humidity: 5%–95%
Humidity: 10%–100% Environment for transportation
Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10%–100%
9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C The MR2A, MR2B and MR2C are 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing boards, adding/dropping and multiplexing any adjacent two channels of signals.
MR2A: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
MR2B: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (half-height slot)
MR2C: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (interface area)
Table 9-6 shows the slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C in OptiX OSN products. Table 9-6 Slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C
OptiX OSN product
MR2A
MR2B
MR2C
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–17
Not supported
Slots 19–26, 29–36
OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s)
Slots 1–8, 11–16
Not supported
Slots 19–26, 29–36
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 5–8, 11–13
Slots 5–6, 19–21
Slots 1–4, 15–18
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 12–13
Slots 6–9, 12–13
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 11–13
Slots 6–9, 1–3, 11–13
Slots 14–17
9.2.1 Functionality
Add/drop two adjacent standard wavelengths in compliance with ITU-T G.692 (DWDM), with signals transmitted transparently and operating wavelength ranging from 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm.
Serve as an OTM or OADM station adding/dropping two channels, as shown in Figure 9-3. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
9 Other Boards
Two MR2A/MR2B/MR2C boards connected in serial can form an OTM station adding/dropping four channels, as shown in Figure 9-4.
Work with the LWX to form an OADM station to add/drop two channels of signals.
The central wavelength complies with ITU-T, and the channel spacing is 100 GHz. Drop1
Drop2
Out
In
Drop1
MI MR2A/ MR2B/ MR2C
Add1
Drop2
Out
MO
In
Add2
Drop1
MI MR2A/ MR2B/ MR2C
Add1
MO
In
Add2
(1)
Drop2
Out
Add1
MI MR2A/ MR2B/ MR2C
MO
Add2
(2)
(1) MR2A/MR2B/MR2C can serve as an OTM station adding/dropping two channels. (2) Two MR2A/MR2C boards connected in serial can serve as an OTM station adding/dropping four channels. Figure 9-3 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C serves as OTM station
In
Out
Drop1
Add2 MR2A/ MR2B/ MR2C
LWX Add1 MI
LWX Drop2 MO
Figure 9-4 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C and LWX form OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals
9.2.2 Principle The functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C board is shown in Figure 9-5.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
9 Other Boards
Front panel
Backplane Out Add1 Add2 MI MO
OADM module
Drop2 Drop1 In
Figure 9-5 Functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
The MR2A/MR2B/MR2C mainly includes the OADM module adding/dropping two channels of signals. The OADM adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. It also provides concatenation interfaces to connect other add/drop multiplexing boards for more powerful add/drop capability. The MR2A/MR2B/MR2C is a passive board has no interface with the backplane.
9.2.3 Front Panel Figure 9-6 shows the front panel of the MR2A board. The front panel of the MR2 B and MR2C is the same as the MR2A board, except the panel dimensions.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
9 Other Boards
MR2A
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
OUT AO1 AO2 M I MO DO2 DO1 IN
MR2A
Figure 9-6 Front panel of the MR2A
1. Indicators
None 2. Interfaces
There are four pairs of LC optical interfaces on the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C front panel, as described in Table 9-7. Table 9-7 Interfaces of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
Interface
Type
Description
A01–A02
LC
Access two channels of service signal added locally.
D01–D02
LC
Drop two channels of service signal locally.
IN
LC
Receive two channels of multiplexed signal.
OUT
LC
Send two channels of multiplexed signal.
MO/MI
LC
Concatenation interface, through which multiple MR2A/MR2B/MR2C boards can be concatenated.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual
9 Other Boards
9.2.4 Version Description The MR2A, MR2B and MR2C have only one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.
9.2.5 Technical Parameters Table 9-8 shows the technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C. Table 9-8 Technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
Parameter
Description
Operating wavelength
Any two adjacent channels with G.692 (DWDM) compliant standard wavelength, with operating wavelength being 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm
Line code pattern
NRZ
Connector
LC
Channel spacing (GHz)
100
Insertion loss (dB)
25
Non-adjacent channel isolation (dB)
>35
–0.5 dB channel wavelength (nm)
